AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON March 27, 2012

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

Form 20-F

(Mark One)

     ¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

or

     þ ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011

or

     ¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 for the transition period from              to

or

     ¨ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report

Commission file number 1-16055

PEARSON PLC

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

England and Wales

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

80 Strand

London, England WC2R 0RL

(Address of principal executive offices)

Stephen Jones

Telephone: +44 20 7010 2000

Fax: +44 20 7010 6060

80 Strand

London, England WC2R 0RL

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile Number and Address of Company Contact Person)

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

Title of Class	Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered
*Ordinary Shares, 25p par value	New York Stock Exchange
American Depositary Shares, each	New York Stock Exchange
Representing One Ordinary Share, 25p per Ordinary Share

* Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of American Depositary Shares, pursuant to the requirements of the SEC.

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

None

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

None

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock at the close of the period covered by the annual report:

Ordinary Shares, 25p par value 815,626,237

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.    Yes  þ    No  ¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes  ¨    No  þ

Note — Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports) and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes  þ    No  ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes  ¨    No  ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated file” and “large accelerated filer”, in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

þ  Large accelerated filer ¨  Accelerated filer ¨  Non-accelerated filer

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing

¨  US GAAP þ  International financial Reporting Standards as Issued
by the International Accounting Standards Board ¨  Other

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the Registrant has elected to follow:     Item 17  ¨    Item 18  ¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act):    Yes  ¨     No  þ

TABLE OF CONTENTS

		Page
	Introduction		3
	Forward-Looking Statements		4
	PART I
Item 1.	Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers		5
Item 2.	Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable		5
Item 3.	Key Information		5
	Selected Consolidated Financial Data		5
	Dividend Information		6
	Exchange Rate Information		7
	Risk Factors		8
Item 4.	Information on the Company		13
	Pearson plc		13
	Overview of Operating Divisions		13
	Our Strategy		13
	Operating Divisions		14
	Operating Cycles		17
	Competition		18
	Intellectual Property		18
	Raw Materials		18
	Government Regulation		19
	Licenses, Patents and Contracts		19
	Legal Proceedings		19
	Recent Developments		19
	Organizational Structure		20
	Property, Plant and Equipment		20
	Capital Expenditures		21
Item 4A.	Unresolved Staff Comments		21
Item 5.	Operating and Financial Review and Prospects		21
	General Overview		22
	Results of Operations		25
	Liquidity and Capital Resources		43
	Accounting Principles		46
Item 6.	Directors, Senior Management and Employees		46
	Directors and Senior Management		46
	Compensation of Senior Management		49
	Share Options of Senior Management		57
	Share Ownership of Senior Management		57
	Employee Share Ownership Plans		58
	Board Practices		58
	Employees		59
Item 7.	Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions		60
Item 8.	Financial Information		60
Item 9.	The Offer and Listing		60
Item 10.	Additional Information		61
	Articles of Association		61
	Material Contracts		67
	Exchange Controls		67
	Tax Considerations		67
	Documents on Display		70

1

		Page
Item 11.	Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk	71
	Introduction	71
	Interest Rates	71
	Currency Exchange Rates	72
	Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts	72
	Derivatives	73
	Quantitative Information about Market Risk	73
Item 12.	Description of Securities Other Than Equity Securities	73
Item 12D.	American Depositary Shares	73
	Fees paid by ADR holders	73
	Fees incurred in past annual period and fees to be paid in the future	74
PART II
Item 13.	Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies	75
Item 14.	Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds	75
Item 15.	Controls and Procedures	75
	Disclosure Controls and Procedures	75
	Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting	75
	Change in Internal Control over Financial Reporting	76
Item 16A.	Audit Committee Financial Expert	76
Item 16B.	Code of Ethics	76
Item 16C.	Principal Accountant Fees and Services	76
Item 16D.	Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees	77
Item 16E.	Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchases	77
Item 16F.	Change in Registrant’s Certifying Auditor	77
Item 16G.	Corporate Governance	77
Item 16H.	Mine Safety Disclosure	77
PART III
Item 17.	Financial Statements	78
Item 18.	Financial Statements	78
Item 19.	Exhibits	79

2

INTRODUCTION

In this Annual Report on Form 20-F (the “Annual Report”) references to “Pearson”, the “Company” or the “Group” are references to Pearson plc, its predecessors and its consolidated subsidiaries, except as the context otherwise requires. “Ordinary Shares” refer to the ordinary share capital of Pearson of par value 25p each. “ADSs” refer to American Depositary Shares which are Ordinary Shares deposited pursuant to the Deposit Agreement dated March 21, 1995, amended and restated as of August 8, 2000 among Pearson, The Bank of New York Mellon as depositary (the “Depositary”) and owners and holders of ADSs (the “Deposit Agreement”). ADSs are represented by American Depositary Receipts (“ADRs”) delivered by the Depositary under the terms of the Deposit Agreement.

We have prepared the financial information contained in this Annual Report in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) which in respect of the accounting standards applicable to the Group do not differ from IFRS as adopted by the European Union (“EU”). Unless we indicate otherwise, any reference in this Annual Report to our consolidated financial statements is to the consolidated financial statements and the related notes, included elsewhere in this Annual Report.

We publish our consolidated financial statements in sterling. We have included, however, references to other currencies. In this Annual Report:

• references to “sterling”, “pounds”, “pence” or “£” are to the lawful currency of the United Kingdom,

• references to “euro” or “€” are to the euro, the lawful currency of the participating Member States in the Third Stage of the European Economic and Monetary Union of the Treaty Establishing the European Commission, and

• references to “US dollars”, “dollars”, “cents” or “$” are to the lawful currency of the United States.

For convenience and except where we specify otherwise, we have translated some sterling figures into US dollars at the rate of £1.00 = $1.55, the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers and foreign currencies as certified by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for customs purposes on December 31, 2011. We do not make any representation that the amounts of sterling have been, could have been or could be converted into dollars at the rates indicated. On February 29, 2012 the noon buying rate for sterling was £1.00 = $1.60

The Group consists of three major worldwide businesses, Pearson Education, the FT Group (“FT”) and the Penguin Group (“Penguin”). See “Item 4. Information on the Company — Overview of operating divisions”.

3

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

You should not rely unduly on forward-looking statements in this Annual Report. This Annual Report, including the sections entitled “Item 3. Key Information — Risk Factors”, “Item 4. Information on the Company” and “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects”, contains forward-looking statements that relate to future events or our future financial performance. In some cases, you can identify forward-looking statements by terms such as “may”, “will”, “should”, “expect”, “intend”, “plan”, “anticipate”, “believe”, “estimate”, “predict”, “potential”, “continue” or the negative of these terms or other comparable terminology. Examples of these forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, statements regarding the following:

• operations and prospects,

• growth strategy,

• funding needs and financing resources,

• expected financial position,

• market risk,

• currency risk,

• US federal and state spending patterns,

• debt levels, and

• general market and economic conditions.

These forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that may cause our or our industry’s actual results, levels of activity, performance or achievements to be materially different from any future results, levels of activity, performance or achievements expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements. In evaluating them, you should consider various factors, including the risks outlined under “Item 3. Key Information — Risk Factors”, which may cause actual events or our industry’s results to differ materially from those expressed or implied by any forward-looking statement. Although we believe that the expectations reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot guarantee future results, levels of activity, performance or achievements.

4

PART I

ITEM 1. IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

Not applicable.

ITEM 2. OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

Not applicable.

ITEM 3. KEY INFORMATION

Selected consolidated financial data

Following the publication of SEC Release No 33-8879 “Acceptance From Foreign Private Issuers of Financial Statements Prepared in Accordance With International Financial Reporting Standards Without Reconciliation to U.S. GAAP”, the Group no longer provides a reconciliation between IFRS and U.S. GAAP.

The table below shows selected consolidated financial data under IFRS as issued by the IASB. The selected consolidated profit and loss account data for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009 and the selected consolidated balance sheet data as at December 31, 2011 and 2010 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included in “Item 18. Financial Statements” in this Annual Report.

The results of the Interactive Data Corporation (Interactive Data) in which Pearson held a 61% interest and which was disposed in July 2010, have been included in discontinued operations for all the years to 2010.

The selected consolidated financial information should be read in conjunction with “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” and our consolidated financial statements and the related notes appearing elsewhere in this Annual Report. The information provided below is not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected from future operations.

5

For convenience, we have translated the 2011 amounts into US dollars at the rate of £1.00 = $1.55, the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers and foreign currencies as certified by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for customs purposes on December 31, 2011.

	Year Ended December 31
	2011			2011			2010			2009			2008			2007
	$			£			£			£			£			£
	(In millions, except for per share amounts)
Consolidated Income Statement data
Total sales		9,086			5,862			5,663			5,140			4,405			3,818
Total operating profit		1,900			1,226			743			619			564			484
Profit after taxation from continuing operations		1,482			956			524			377			344			274
Profit for the financial year		1,482			956			1,300			462			323			310
Consolidated Earnings data per share
Basic earnings per equity share(1)	$	1.85			119.6	p		161.9	p		53.2	p		36.6	p		35.6	p
Diluted earnings per equity share(2)	$	1.85			119.3	p		161.5	p		53.1	p		36.6	p		35.6	p
Basic earnings from continuing operations per equity share(1)	$	1.85			119.6	p		66.0	p		47.0	p		42.9	p		34.1	p
Diluted earnings from continuing operations per equity share(2)	$	1.85			119.3	p		65.9	p		47.0	p		42.9	p		34.1	p
Dividends per ordinary share	$	0.65			42.0	p		38.7	p		35.5	p		33.8	p		31.6	p
Consolidated Balance Sheet data at period end
Total assets (non-current assets plus current assets)		17,428			11,244			10,668			9,412			9,896			7,292
Net assets		9,241			5,962			5,605			4,636			5,024			3,874
Long-term obligations(3)		(4,948	)		(3,192	)		(2,821	)		(3,051	)		(2,902	)		(1,681	)
Capital stock		316			204			203			203			202			202
Number of equity shares outstanding (millions of ordinary shares)		816			816			813			810			809			808

Notes:

(1) Basic earnings per equity share is based on profit for the financial period and the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period.

(2) Diluted earnings per equity share is based on diluted earnings for the financial period and the diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period. Diluted earnings comprise earnings adjusted for the tax benefit on the conversion of share options by employees and the weighted average number of ordinary shares adjusted for the dilutive effect of share options.

(3) Long-term obligations comprise any liabilities with a maturity of more than one year, including medium and long-term borrowings, derivative financial instruments, pension obligations and deferred income tax liabilities.

Dividend information

We pay dividends to holders of ordinary shares on dates that are fixed in accordance with the guidelines of the London Stock Exchange. Our board of directors normally declares an interim dividend in July or August of each year to be paid in September or October. Our board of directors normally recommends a final dividend following the end of the fiscal year to which it relates, to be paid in the following May or June, subject to shareholders’ approval at our annual general meeting. At our annual general meeting on April 27, 2012 our shareholders will be asked to approve a final dividend of 28.0p per ordinary share for the year ended December 31, 2011.

6

The table below sets forth the amounts of interim, final and total dividends paid in respect of each fiscal year indicated, and is translated into cents per ordinary share at the noon buying rate in The City of New York on each of the respective payment dates for interim and final dividends. The final dividend for the 2011 fiscal year will be paid on May 4, 2012.

Fiscal year	Interim		Final		Total		Interim		Final			Total
	(Pence per ordinary share)						(Cents per ordinary share)
2011		14.0		28.0		42.0		22.1		43.4	*		65.5
2010		13.0		25.7		38.7		20.3		42.2			62.5
2009		12.2		23.3		35.5		19.8		34.3			54.1
2008		11.8		22.0		33.8		21.6		33.2			54.8
2007		11.1		20.5		31.6		22.4		39.9			62.3

* As the 2011 final dividend had not been paid by the filing date, the dividend has been translated into cents using the noon buying rate for sterling at December 31, 2011.

Future dividends will be dependent on our future earnings, financial condition and cash flow, as well as other factors affecting the Group.

Exchange rate information

The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, information concerning the noon buying rate for sterling, expressed in dollars per pound sterling. The average rate is calculated by using the average of the noon buying rates in The City of New York on each day during a monthly period and on the last day of each month during an annual period. On December 31, 2011 the noon buying rate for cable transfers and foreign currencies as certified by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for customs purposes for sterling was £1.00 = $1.55. On February 29, 2012 the noon buying rate for sterling was £1.00 = $1.60.

Month	High		Low
February 2012	$	1.60	$	1.57
January 2012	$	1.58	$	1.53
December 2011	$	1.57	$	1.54
November 2011	$	1.61	$	1.55
October 2011	$	1.61	$	1.54
September 2011	$	1.62	$	1.54

Year Ended December 31	Average rate
2011	$	1.61
2010	$	1.54
2009	$	1.57
2008	$	1.84
2007	$	2.01

7

Risk factors

You should carefully consider the risk factors described below, as well as the other information included in this Annual Report. Our business, financial condition or results from operations could be materially adversely affected by any or all of these risks, or by other risks that we presently cannot identify.

Global economic conditions may adversely impact our financial performance.

With the continued pressure on the worldwide economies, especially the Eurozone, during 2011, there is an increased risk of a further weakening in trading conditions in 2012 which could adversely impact our financial performance. The effect of continued deterioration in the global economy will vary across our different businesses and will depend on the depth, length and severity of any economic downturn. Specific economic risks by business are described more fully in the other risk factors below.

A significant deterioration in Group profitability and/or cash flow caused by prolonged economic instability could reduce our liquidity and/or impair our financial ratios, and trigger a need to raise additional funds from the capital markets and/or renegotiate our banking covenants.

To the extent the economic difficulties continue, or worldwide economic conditions materially deteriorate, the Group’s revenues, profitability and cash flows could be significantly reduced as customers would be unable to purchase products and services in the expected quantities and/or pay for them within normal agreed terms. A liquidity shortfall may delay certain development initiatives or may expose the Group to a need to negotiate further funding. While we anticipate that our existing cash and cash equivalents, together with availability under our existing credit facility, cash balances and cash from operations, will be sufficient to fund our operations for at least the next 12 months, we may need to raise additional capital to fund operations in the future or to finance acquisitions. If we seek to raise additional capital in order to meet various objectives, including developing future technologies and services, increasing working capital, acquiring businesses and responding to competitive pressures, capital may not be available on favorable terms or may not be available at all.

If the global economy weakens further and/or the global financial markets collapse, whether in general or as a result of specific factors, such as the current European sovereign debt crisis, we may not have access to or could lose our bank deposits. Lack of sufficient capital resources could significantly limit our ability to take advantage of business and strategic opportunities. Any additional capital raised through the sale of equity or debt securities with an equity component would dilute our stock ownership. If adequate additional funds are not available, we may be required to delay, reduce the scope of, or eliminate material parts of our business strategy, including potential additional acquisitions or development of new technologies.

Our education, business information and book publishing businesses will be impacted by the rate of and state of technological change, including the digital evolution and other disruptive technologies.

A common trend facing all our businesses is the digitization of content and proliferation of distribution channels, either over the internet, or via other electronic means, replacing traditional print formats. The digital migration brings the need for change in product distribution, consumers’ perception of value and the publisher’s position between retailers and authors. The trend to ebooks has created contraction in the consumer books retail market which increases the risk of bankruptcy of a major retail customer. This could disrupt short-term product supply to the market as well as result in a large debt write off.

We face competitive threats both from large media players and from smaller businesses, online and mobile portals and news redistributors operating in the digital arena and providing alternative sources of news and information. New distribution channels, e.g. digital format, the internet, online retailers, growing delivery platforms (e.g. e-readers), combined with the concentration of retailer power pose both threats and opportunities to our traditional consumer publishing models, potentially impacting both sales volumes and pricing.

8

If we do not adapt rapidly to these changes we may lose business to ‘faster’ more ‘agile’ competitors, who increasingly are non-traditional competitors, i.e. technology companies, making their identification all the more difficult. We may be required to invest significant resources to further adapt to the changing competitive environment.

Our US educational solutions and assessment businesses and our UK training businesses may be adversely affected by changes in government funding resulting from either general economic conditions, changes in government educational funding, programs, policy decisions, legislation and/or changes in the procurement processes.

The results and growth of our US educational solutions and assessment businesses are dependent on the level of federal and state educational funding, which in turn is dependent on the robustness of state finances and the level of funding allocated to educational programs. State, local and municipal finances have been adversely affected by the US recession and the unknown timing of economic recovery. Funding pressures remain, with competition from low price and disruptive new business models and promotion of open source to keep costs down. The current challenging environment could impact our ability to collect on education-related debt.

Government changes can also affect the funding available for educational expenditure, which include the impact of education reform. Similarly changes in the government procurement process for textbooks, learning material and student tests, and vocational training programs can also affect our markets. Changes in curricula, delays in the timing of the adoptions and changes in the student testing process can all affect these programs and therefore the size of our market in any given year. Also, changes in the UK government approach to training and apprentice program policy and funding could affect the business model for these businesses.

There are multiple competing demands for educational funds and there is no guarantee that new textbooks or testing or training programs will be funded, or that we will win this business.

If we do not adequately protect our intellectual property and proprietary rights our competitive position and results may be adversely affected and limit our ability to grow.

Our products and services largely comprise intellectual property delivered through a variety of media, including newspapers, books, the internet and other growing delivery platforms. We rely on trademark, copyright and other intellectual property laws to establish and protect our proprietary rights in these products and services.

Our intellectual property rights in countries such as the US and the UK, jurisdictions covering the largest proportion of our operations, are well established. However, we also conduct business in other countries where the extent of effective legal protection for intellectual property rights is uncertain, and this uncertainty could affect our future growth. We cannot guarantee that our intellectual property rights will provide competitive advantages to us; our intellectual property rights will be enforced in jurisdictions where competition may be intense or where legal protection may be weak; any of the intellectual property rights that we may employ in our business will not lapse or be invalidated, circumvented, challenged, or abandoned; or that we will not lose the ability to assert our intellectual property rights against others. Moreover, despite trademark and copyright protection, third parties may copy, infringe or otherwise profit from our proprietary rights without our authorization. The loss or diminution in value of these proprietary rights or our intellectual property could have a material adverse effect on our business and financial performance.

A control breakdown or service failure in our school assessment businesses could result in financial loss and reputational damage.

There are inherent risks associated with our school assessment businesses, both in the US and the UK. A service failure caused by a breakdown in our testing and assessment processes could lead to a mis-grading of student tests and/or late delivery of test results to students and their schools. In either event we may be subject to legal claims, penalty charges under our contracts, non-renewal of contracts and/or the suspension or withdrawal of our accreditation to conduct tests. It is also possible that such events would result in adverse publicity, which may affect our ability to retain existing contracts and/or obtain new customers.

9

Our education technology and assessment businesses involve complex contractual relationships with both government agencies and commercial customers for the provision of various testing services. Our financial results, growth prospects and/or reputation may be adversely affected if these contracts and relationships are poorly managed.

These businesses are characterized by multi-million pound sterling contracts spread over several years. As in any contracting business, there are inherent risks associated with the bidding process, start-up, operational performance and contract compliance (including penalty clauses) which could adversely affect our financial performance and/or reputation. Failure to retain these contracts at the end of the contract term could adversely impact our future revenue growth. At Edexcel, our UK Examination board and testing business, any change in UK Government policy to examination marking (e.g. price capping) could have a significant impact on our present business model.

Our investment into inherently riskier emerging markets is growing and the returns may be lower than anticipated.

To take advantage of international growth opportunities and to reduce our reliance on our core US and UK markets we are increasing our investments in a number of emerging markets, some of which are inherently more risky than our traditional markets. Political, regulatory, economic and legal systems in emerging markets may be less predictable than in countries with more developed institutional structures. Political, regulatory, economic, currency, reputational and corporate governance risks (including fraud) as well as unmanaged expansion are all factors which could limit our returns on investments made in these markets.

Failure to generate anticipated revenue growth, synergies and/or cost savings from acquisitions could lead to goodwill and intangible asset impairments.

We continually acquire and dispose of businesses to achieve our strategic objectives. In 2011 we acquired TutorVista, CTI Education, Schoolnet, EDI, Stark Holding, TQ, Connections Education, Global Education and several other small acquisitions, and we sold our stake in FTSE International. Acquired goodwill and intangible assets could be impaired if we are unable to generate the anticipated revenue growth, synergies and/or cost savings associated with these or other acquisitions.

We operate in markets which are dependent on Information Technology (IT) systems and technological change.

All our businesses, to a greater or lesser extent, are dependent on information technology. We either provide software and/or internet services to our customers or we use complex IT systems and products to support our business activities, particularly in business information publishing, back-office processing and infrastructure. We face several technological risks associated with software product development and service delivery in our educational businesses, information technology security (including virus and hacker attacks), e-commerce, enterprise resource planning system implementations and upgrades. Although plans and procedures are in place to reduce such risks, our businesses could be adversely affected if our systems and infrastructure experience a significant failure or interruption.

Failure to comply with data privacy regulations and standards or weakness in internet security result in a major data privacy breach causing reputational damage to our brands and financial loss.

Across our businesses we hold large volumes of personal data including that of employees, customers and, in our assessment and information technology businesses, students and citizens. Despite our implementation of security measures, individuals may try to gain unauthorized access to our data in order to misappropriate such information for potentially fraudulent purposes. Any perceived or actual unauthorized disclosure of personally-identifiable information, whether through breach of our network by an unauthorized party, employee theft, misuse or error or otherwise, could harm our reputation, impair our ability to attract and retain our customers, or subject us to claims or litigation arising from damages suffered by individuals, and thereby harm our business

10

and operating results. Failure to adequately protect personal data could lead to penalties, significant remediation costs, reputational damage, potential cancellation of some existing contracts and inability to compete for future business. In addition, we could incur significant costs in complying with the multitude of state, federal and foreign laws regarding the unauthorized disclosure of personal information.

Our reported earnings and cash flows may be adversely affected by changes in our pension costs and funding requirements.

We operate a number of pension plans throughout the world, the principal ones being in the UK and the US. The major plans are self-administered with the plans’ assets held independently of the Group. Regular valuations, conducted by independent qualified actuaries, are used to determine pension costs and funding requirements. As these assets are invested in the capital markets, which are often volatile, the plans may require additional funding from us, which could have an adverse impact on our results.

It is our policy to ensure that each pension plan is adequately funded, over time, to meet its ongoing and future liabilities. Our earnings and cash flows may be adversely affected by the need to provide additional funding to eliminate pension fund deficits in our defined benefit plans. Our greatest exposure relates to our UK defined benefit pension plan, which is valued once every three years. Pension fund deficits may arise because of inadequate investment returns, increased member life expectancy, changes in actuarial assumptions and changes in pension regulations, including accounting rules and minimum funding requirements.

Operational disruption to our business caused by our third party providers, a major disaster and/or external threats could restrict our ability to supply products and services to our customers.

Across all our businesses, we manage complex operational and logistical arrangements including distribution centers, data centers and large office facilities as well as relationships with third party print sites. We have also outsourced some support functions, including information technology and warehousing, to third party providers. The failure of third parties to whom we have outsourced business functions could adversely affect our reputation and financial condition. Failure to recover from a major disaster, (e.g. fire, flood etc) at a key facility or the disruption of supply from a key third party vendor or partner (e.g. due to bankruptcy) could restrict our ability to service our customers. Similarly external threats, such as a flu pandemic, terrorist attacks, strikes, weather etc, could all affect our business and employees, disrupting our daily business activities.

Changes in students’ buying and distribution behaviour put downward pressure on price.

Students are seeking cheaper sources of content, e.g. online discounters, file sharing, use of pirated copies, and rentals, along with open source. This change in behaviour puts downward pressure on textbook prices in our major markets, and this could adversely impact our results.

Expected benefits from our finance transformation programme initiatives may not be realised.

We have entered into a substantial finance transformation programme based around shared and common processes and services, including the outsourcing of financial transaction processing, which is expected to result in significant cost savings in future years. The programme may take longer than planned, cost more than planned, and may cause disruption to our business. There is no assurance that the full extent of the anticipated benefits will be realised in the timeline envisaged.

Changes in our tax position can significantly affect our reported earnings and cash flows.

Changes in corporate tax rates and/or other relevant tax laws in the UK and/or the US could have a material impact on our future reported tax rate and/or our future tax payments. We have been subject to audit by tax authorities. Although we believe our tax provision is reasonable, the final determination of our tax liability could be materially different from our historical income tax provisions, which could have a material effect on our financial position, results of operations or cash flows.

11

We generate a substantial proportion of our revenue in foreign currencies, particularly the US dollar, and foreign exchange rate fluctuations could adversely affect our earnings and the strength of our balance sheet.

As with any international business our earnings can be materially affected by exchange rate movements. We are particularly exposed to movements in the US dollar to sterling exchange rate as approximately 60% of our revenue is generated in US dollars. Sales for 2011, translated at 2010 average rates, would have been £122m or 2% higher.

The inherent volatility of advertising could adversely affect the profitability of our newspaper business.

Advertising revenue is susceptible to fluctuations in economic cycles. Certain of our products, such as the Financial Times newspaper, are more advertising-driven than our other products. Consequently, these products are more affected by decreases in advertising revenue. As the internet continues to grow as a global medium for information, communication and commerce, advertisers are increasingly shifting advertising dollars from print to online media. Any downturn in corporate and financial advertising spend due to the economic slowdown will negatively impact the results.

If we fail to attract and retain appropriately skilled employees, our business may be harmed.

Our success depends on the skill, experience and dedication of our employees. If we are unable to retain and attract sufficiently experienced and capable personnel, especially in technology, product development, sales and management, our business and financial results may suffer. When talented employees leave, we may have difficulty replacing them, and our business may suffer. There can be no assurance that we will be able to successfully retain and attract the personnel that we need.

Social, environmental and ethical risks may also adversely impact our business.

We consider social, environmental and ethical (SEE) risks no differently to the way we manage any other business risk. These include journalistic/author integrity, ethical business behaviour, intellectual copyright protection, compliance with UN Global Compact standards, environmental impact, people and data privacy.

Our business depends on a strong brand, and any failure to maintain, protect and enhance our brand would hurt our ability to retain or expand our business.

We have developed a strong brand that we believe has contributed significantly to the success of our business. Maintaining, protecting and enhancing the Pearson brand is critical to expanding our business and will depend largely on our ability to maintain our customers’ trust in our solutions and in the quality and integrity of our products and services. If we do not successfully maintain a strong brand, our business could be harmed.

Government investigations of Penguin and other major publishers over agency arrangements for selling ebooks will likely result in formal legal actions and/or negotiated agreements that, along with private litigation, might impact Penguin’s business.

Government investigations of Penguin and other major publishers over agency arrangements for selling ebooks will likely result in formal legal actions and/or negotiated agreements that, along with private litigation, might impact Penguin’s business. These investigations are ongoing and Penguin is cooperating. Penguin is defending itself in these actions and believes that it is fully compliant with all applicable laws. See “Item 4. Information on the Company — Legal Proceedings” for more information.

12

ITEM 4. INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

Pearson plc

Pearson plc, (Pearson) is an international media and education company with its principal operations in the education, business information and consumer publishing markets. We create and manage intellectual property, which we promote and sell to our customers under well-known brand names, to inform, educate and entertain. We deliver our content in a variety of forms and through a variety of channels, including books, newspapers and online services. We increasingly offer services as well as content, from test creation, administration and processing to teacher development and school software. Though we operate in more than 70 countries around the world, today our largest markets are the US (57% of sales) and Europe (23% of sales) on a continuing basis.

Pearson was incorporated and registered in 1897 under the laws of England and Wales as a limited company and re-registered under the UK Companies Act as a public limited company in 1981. We conduct our operations primarily through our subsidiaries and other affiliates. Our principal executive offices are located at 80 Strand, London WC2R 0RL, United Kingdom (telephone: +44 (0) 20 7010 2000).

Overview of operating divisions

Pearson consists of three major worldwide businesses:

Pearson Education is a leading provider of educational materials and learning technologies. It provides test development, processing and scoring services to governments, educational institutions, corporations and professional bodies around the world. It publishes across the curriculum and provides a range of education services including teacher development, educational software and system-wide solutions, and also owns and operates schools. In 2011, Pearson Education operated through three worldwide segments, which we refer to as “North American Education”, “International Education” and “Professional”.

The FT Group provides business and financial news, data, comment and analysis, in print and online, to the international business community. The FT Group includes the Financial Times newspaper and FT.com website, a range of specialist financial magazines and online services, and Mergermarket, which provides proprietary forward-looking insights and intelligence to businesses and financial institutions. The FT Group has a 50% ownership stake in The Economist Group. During 2010 Interactive Data, in which Pearson held a 61% interest and which was part of the FT Group was sold. In addition, during the year the FT Group sold its 50% ownership stake in FTSE International.

The Penguin Group is one of the world’s leading consumer publishing businesses and an iconic global brand. We publish the works of many authors in an extensive portfolio of fiction, non-fiction and reference titles under imprints including Penguin, Hamish Hamilton, Putnam, Berkley, and Dorling Kindersley.

Our strategy

Our goal is to be the world’s leading ‘learning’ company, and to help people make progress in their lives through learning, wherever and whenever they are learning — young or old; at home, school or at work; and through whatever medium and style of learning is most effective.

We aim to produce consistent growth on three key financial measures — earnings per share, cash flow and return on invested capital — which we believe are, together, good indicators that we are building the long-term value of Pearson.

To achieve this goal, our strategy has four parts, common to all our businesses:

• Investment: We are a long-term investor in our business. This year we made £0.5bn of organic investment in new learning programmes and technologies, new authors, and in taking our assets into new markets.

13

Over the past five years we have invested £2.5bn in acquisitions, all of which have been additions or fill-ins to build our existing business. Our strong balance sheet allows us to contemplate further investment should the opportunities arise.

• Technology: Pearson today is a technology company as much as a newspaper or book publishing company. Digital business will this year contribute about one-third of our sales, or almost £2bn in total. Five years ago digital business was about 20% of our sales, and this represents a fundamental shift in our business, culture and growth opportunities.

• Fast-growing markets: Pearson has market leading positions in major developed economies, particularly the US, UK and Western Europe. We are investing to become a much larger global company, and have market-leading businesses in China, India, Brazil and Southern Africa. 11% of our sales and 22% of our people in 2011 are from the ‘Emerging markets’, as we generate rapid growth in these areas.

• Efficiency and scale: While we have grown we have also focused on steady efficiency gains. Our margins reached an all time high of 16.1% this year, and our cash generation, as for the past 5 years, has been more than 100% of profits. However we still see more to go, especially as we accelerate our transition from traditional print-based activities to digital and service models.

Operating divisions

Pearson Education

Pearson Education is one of the leading providers of educational materials and learning technologies. We provide test development, processing and scoring services to governments, educational institutions, corporations and professional bodies around the world. We publish across the curriculum and provide a range of education services including teacher development, educational software and system-wide solutions.

We report Pearson Education’s performance in the three segments: North American Education, International Education, and Professional. In 2011, Pearson Education had sales of £4,390m or 75% (74% in 2010) of Pearson’s total continuing sales. Pearson Education generated 52% of Pearson’s continuing operating profit.

North American Education

Our North American Education business serves educators and students in the USA and Canada from early education through elementary, middle and high schools and into higher education with a wide range of products and services: curriculum textbooks and other learning materials; student assessments and testing services; and education technologies. Pearson has a leading position in each of these areas and a distinctive strategy of connecting those parts to support institutions and personalize learning. We have now integrated our North American School and Higher Education companies, which we believe will bring significant opportunities to develop growth businesses, to share investments and technologies and to gain further efficiencies.

Our North American School business contains a unique mix of publishing, testing and technology products for the elementary and secondary school markets, which are increasingly integrated. The major customers of this business are state education boards and local school districts. The business publishes high quality curriculum programmes for school students, at both elementary and secondary level, under a number of imprints including Pearson Scott Foresman and Pearson Prentice Hall. We also provide digital instructional solutions under Pearson Digital Learning, such as enVisionMATH and Miller-Levine Biology. The business also provides student information, assessment, reporting and business solutions (Pearson School Systems), which enables elementary and secondary schools and school districts to record and manage information about student attendance and performance, and instructional improvement systems (Schoolnet) that allow for data-driven personalized instruction and teacher support.

Our North American Higher Education business is the largest publisher of textbooks and related course materials for colleges and universities in the US. We publish across all of the main fields of study with imprints

14

such as Pearson Prentice Hall, Pearson Addison Wesley, Pearson Allyn & Bacon, Pearson Benjamin Cummings and Pearson Longman. Typically, professors or other instructors select or ‘adopt’ the textbooks and online resources they recommend for their students, which students then purchase either in a bookstore or online. Today the majority of our textbooks are accompanied by online services which include homework and assessment tools, study guides and course management systems that enable professors to create online courses. We have also introduced new formats such as downloadable audio study guides and electronic textbooks which are sold on subscription. In addition, we have a fast-growing custom publishing business which works with professors to produce textbooks and online resources specifically adapted for their particular course.

Our North American Assessment and Information business provides educational assessment services and solutions in the US, developing, scoring and processing a large volume of student tests each year, for US states and the federal government.

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Results of Operations — Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to year ended December 31, 2010 — Sales and operating profit by division — North American Education” for a discussion of developments during 2011 with respect to this division.

International Education

Our International Education business covers all educational publishing and related services outside North America. Our portfolio includes innovative text books, digital learning solutions, online testing and assessments and a suite of integrated services.

Our International schools business publishes educational materials in local languages in a number of countries. We are one of the world’s leading providers of English Language Teaching (ELT) materials for children and adults, published under the well-known Longman imprint. In 2010, we continued to strengthen our position further in international markets through the acquisition of Wall Street Institute, providing premium spoken English training for adults in 25 territories across Asia, Europe, the Middle East and Latin America, and Sistema Educacional Brasileiro’s schools learning systems business. In 2011 we acquired TutorVista, a school tutoring services business in India.

Our International higher education business adapts our textbooks and technology services for individual markets, and we have a growing local publishing program, with our key markets including the UK, Benelux, Mexico, Germany, Hong Kong, Korea, Taiwan, Singapore, Japan and Malaysia.

We are also a leading provider of testing, assessment and qualification services in a number of key markets including the UK, under the brand name Edexcel, Australia, New Zealand, South Africa, Hong Kong and the Middle East. In 2011 we acquired Global Education, a leading provider of test preparation services for English language and other professional qualifications in China.

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Results of Operations — Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to year ended December 31, 2010 — Sales and operating profit by division — International Education” for a discussion of developments during 2011 with respect to this division.

Professional

Our Professional education business is focused on publishing, training, testing and certification for professionals. Over the past five years we have significantly re-orientated our professional publishing business towards long-term growth markets and built professional testing into a profitable industry leader.

Our Professional education business publishes under the following imprints: Addison Wesley Professional, Prentice Hall and Cisco Press (for IT professionals); Peachpit Press and New Riders (for graphics and design professionals); Que and Sams (consumer and professional imprint); and Financial Times-Prentice Hall (for the business education market).

15

Our professional testing business, Pearson VUE, manages major long-term contracts to provide qualification and assessment services through its network of test centers around the world. Key customers include major technology companies, the Graduate Management Admissions Council, the National Council of State Boards of Nursing, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority and the UK’s Driving Standards Agency.

Our professional training business has developed over the past two years with the acquisition of Melorio plc, a vocational training group in 2010, and TQ Holdings Ltd in 2011. This business provides technical education and training services with particular expertise in skills related to defense, engineering, oil and gas and construction sectors.

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Results of Operations — Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to year ended December 31, 2010 — Sales and operating profit by division — Professional” for a discussion of developments during 2011 with respect to this division.

The FT Group

The FT Group provides a broad range of data, analysis and services through a growing number of print, digital and mobile channels, to an audience of internationally-minded business people and financial institutions. In 2011, the FT Group had sales of £427m, or 7% of Pearson’s total continuing sales (7% in 2010), and contributed 39% of Pearson’s operating profit from continuing operations, taking into account the one-off gain on sale of FTSE International.

FT Group comprises the Financial Times, FT.com website, and a portfolio of financial magazines and online financial information companies. During 2010 Interactive Data, our 61%-owned financial information company was sold and has been reclassified as a discontinued operation for all periods to the date of disposal.

The FT Group has significantly shifted its business towards digital, subscription and content revenues and has continued to invest in talent and in services in faster growing emerging markets.

The Financial Times is one of the world’s leading international daily business newspapers, with five editions in the UK, Continental Europe, the US, Asia-Pacific and the Middle East. Its main sources of revenue are from sales of the newspaper, (both in print and online), advertising and conferences. The Financial Times is complemented by FT.com which sells content and advertising online, and which charges subscribers for detailed industry news, comment and analysis, while providing general news and market data to a wider audience.

FT Business publishes specialist information on the retail, personal and institutional finance industries through titles including Investors Chronicle, Money Management, Financial Adviser and The Banker.

Mergermarket, our online financial data and intelligence provider, provides early stage proprietary intelligence to financial institutions and corporates. Its key products include Mergermarket, Debtwire, dealReporter, Wealthmonitor and BioPharm Insight.

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Results of Operations — Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to year ended December 31, 2010 — Sales and operating profit by division — FT Group” for a discussion of developments during 2011 with respect to this division.

Joint Ventures and Associates

The FT Group also has a number of associates and joint ventures, including:

• 50% interest in The Economist Group, publisher of one of the world’s leading weekly business and current affairs magazines.

16

• 50% interest in Business Day and Financial Mail, publishers of one of South Africa’s leading financial newspapers and magazines.

• 33% interest in Vedomosti, a leading Russian business newspaper.

On December 16, 2011, the FT Group sold its 50% interest in FTSE International to the London Stock Exchange, the owner of the remaining 50%.

The Penguin Group

Penguin is one of the most famous brands in book publishing. It publishes over 4,000 fiction and non-fiction books each year, on paper, screens and in audio formats for readers of all ages, and has an extensive range of backlist and frontlist titles including top literary prize winners, classics, reference volumes and children’s titles.

Penguin operates around the world through a series of connected national publishing houses. It publishes under a number of well known imprints including Putnam, Viking, Allen Lane, Hamish Hamilton, Berkley, Dorling Kindersley, Puffin and Ladybird. Penguin combines a longstanding commitment to local publishing with a determination to benefit from its worldwide scale, a globally recognized brand and growing demand for books in emerging markets. Its largest businesses are in the US, the UK, Australia, Canada, Ireland, India, New Zealand and South Africa.

In 2011, Penguin had sales of £1,045m, representing 18% of Pearson’s total continuing sales (19% in 2010) and contributed 9% of Pearson’s operating profit from continuing operations. Its largest market is the US, which generated around 58% of Penguin’s sales in 2011. Penguin earned around 12% of its revenues from the sale of ebooks in 2011.

Penguin sells directly to bookshops and through wholesalers. Retail bookshops normally maintain relationships with both publishers and wholesalers and use the channel that best serves the specific requirements of an order. It also sells through online retailers such as Amazon.com, as well as Penguin’s own website. Penguin also sells direct to the customer via digital sales agents.

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Results of Operations — Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to year ended December 31, 2010 — Sales and operating profit by division — The Penguin Group” for a discussion of developments during 2011 with respect to this division.

Operating cycles

Pearson determines a normal operating cycle separately for each entity/cash generating unit within the Group with distinct economic characteristics. The “normal operating cycle” for each of the Group’s education businesses is primarily based on the expected period over which the educational programs and titles will generate cash flows, and also takes account of the time it takes to produce the educational programs.

Particularly for the North American Education businesses, there are well established cycles operating in the market:

• The School market is primarily driven by an adoption cycle in which major state education boards ‘adopt’ programs and provide funding to schools for the purchase of these programs. There is an established and published adoption cycle with new adoptions taking place on average every 5 years for a particular subject. Once adopted, a program will typically sell over the course of the subsequent 5 years. The Company renews its pre-publication assets to meet the market adoption cycles. Therefore the operating cycle naturally follows the market cycle.

• The Higher Education market has a similar pattern, with colleges and professors typically refreshing their courses and selecting revised programs on a regular basis, often in line with the release of new editions or

17

new technology offerings. The Company renews its pre-publication assets to meet the typical demand for new editions of, or revisions to, educational programs. Analysis of historical data shows that the average life cycle of Higher Education content is up to 5 years. Again the operating cycle mirrors the market cycle.

A development phase of typically 12 to 18 months for Higher Education and up to 24 months for School precedes the period during which the Company receives and delivers against orders for the products it has developed for the program.

The International Education markets operate in a similar way although often with less formal ‘adoption’ processes.

The operating cycles in respect of Professional and the Penguin segment are more specialized in nature as they relate to educational or heavy reference products released into smaller markets (e.g. the financial training, IT and travel sectors). Nevertheless, in these markets, there is still a regular cycle of product renewal, in line with demand which management monitor. Typically the life cycle is 5 years for Professional content and up to 4 years for Penguin content. Elsewhere in the Group operating cycles are typically less than one year.

Competition

All of Pearson’s businesses operate in highly competitive environments.

Pearson Education competes with other publishers and creators of educational materials and services. These companies include large international companies, such as McGraw-Hill and Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, alongside smaller niche players that specialize in a particular academic discipline or focus on a learning technology. Competition is based on the ability to deliver quality products and services that address the specified curriculum needs and appeal to the school boards, educators and government officials making purchasing decisions.

The FT Group competes with newspapers and other information sources, such as The Wall Street Journal, by offering timely and expert journalism and market intelligence. It competes for advertisers with other forms of media based on the ability to offer an effective means for advertisers to reach their target audience.

The Penguin Group competes with other publishers of fiction and non-fiction books. Principal competitors include Random House, HarperCollins, and Hachette Group. Publishers compete by developing a portfolio of books by established authors and by seeking out and promoting talented new writers.

Intellectual property

Our principal intellectual property assets consist of our trademarks and other rights in our brand names, particularly the Financial Times and the various imprints of Penguin and Pearson Education, as well as all copyrights for our content and our patents held in the testing business in the name of Pearson NCS. We believe we have taken all appropriate available legal steps to protect our intellectual property in all relevant jurisdictions.

Raw materials

Paper is the principal raw material used by each of Pearson Education, the FT Group and the Penguin Group. We purchase most of our paper through our Global Sourcing department located in the United States. We have not experienced and do not anticipate difficulty in obtaining adequate supplies of paper for our operations, with sourcing available from numerous suppliers. While local prices fluctuate depending upon local market conditions, we have not experienced extensive volatility in fulfilling paper requirements. In the event of a sharp increase in paper prices, we have a number of alternatives to minimize the impact on our operating margins, including modifying the grades of paper used in production.

18

Government regulation

The manufacture of certain of our products in various markets is subject to governmental regulation relating to the discharge of materials into the environment. Our operations are also subject to the risks and uncertainties attendant to doing business in numerous countries. Some of the countries in which we conduct these operations maintain controls on the repatriation of earnings and capital and restrict the means available to us for hedging potential currency fluctuation risks. The operations that are affected by these controls, however, are not material to us. Accordingly, these controls have not significantly affected our international operations. Regulatory authorities may have enforcement powers that could have an impact on us. We believe, however, that in light of the nature of our business the risk of these sanctions does not represent a material threat to us.

Licenses, patents and contracts

We are not dependent upon any particular licenses, patents or new manufacturing processes that are material to our business or profitability. Likewise, we are not materially dependent upon any contracts with suppliers or customers, including contracts of an industrial, commercial or financial nature.

Legal Proceedings

We and our subsidiaries are from time to time the subject of legal proceedings incidental to the nature of our and their operations. These may include private litigation or arbitrations, governmental proceedings and investigations by regulatory bodies. We do not currently expect that the outcome of pending proceedings or investigations, either individually or in aggregate, will have a significant effect on our financial position or profitability nor have any such proceedings had such effect in the recent past. To our knowledge, there are no material proceedings in which any member of senior management or any of our affiliates is a party adverse to us or any of our subsidiaries or in respect of which any of those persons has a material interest adverse to us or any of our subsidiaries.

During the year various government bodies in the US and Europe have been in the process of investigating Penguin and other major publishers over the agency arrangements for selling e-books. These investigations are ongoing and Penguin is cooperating and believes that it was fully compliant with all applicable laws. However, while the group cannot predict the final outcome or the impact on Penguin, it currently expects that these investigations will likely result in formal legal actions by the governmental bodies and/or negotiated agreements. At the same time beginning in August 2011, Penguin and various other book publishers and book retailers have been sued in a number of private consumer class action law suits in the US and Canada which allege violation of the anti-trust and unfair competition laws by the defendants in connection with the adoption of the agency selling model for e-books. The complaints generally seek treble damages, injunctive relief and attorneys’ fees, and in certain instances seek punitive damages, injunctive relief and attorneys’ fees, as well as compensatory damages. Penguin is defending itself in those actions and believes that it was fully compliant with all applicable laws.

Recent developments

There have been no significant post balance sheet events.

19

Organizational structure

Pearson plc is a holding company which conducts its business primarily through subsidiaries and other affiliates throughout the world. Below is a list of our significant subsidiaries as at December 31, 2011, including name, country of incorporation or residence, proportion of ownership interest and, if different, proportion of voting power held.

Name	Country of incorporation/residence	Percentage interest/voting power
Pearson Education
Pearson Education Inc.	United States (Delaware)		100	%
Pearson Education Ltd.	England and Wales		100	%
Edexcel Ltd.	England and Wales		100	%
NCS Pearson Inc.	United States (Minnesota)		100	%
FT Group
The Financial Times Ltd.	England and Wales		100	%
Mergermarket Ltd.	England and Wales		100	%
The Penguin Group
Penguin Group (USA) Inc.	United States (Delaware)		100	%
The Penguin Publishing Co Ltd.	England and Wales		100	%
Dorling Kindersley Holdings Ltd	England and Wales		100	%

Property, plant and equipment

Our headquarters are located at leasehold premises in London, England. We own or lease approximately 1,100 properties, including approximately 600 testing/teaching centers in more than 70 countries worldwide, the majority of which are located in the United Kingdom and the United States.

The properties owned and leased by us consist mainly of offices, distribution centers and computer testing/teaching centers.

The vast majority of our printing is carried out by third party suppliers. We operate a small digital print operation as part of our Pearson Assessment & Testing businesses which provides short-run and print-on-demand products, typically custom client applications.

We own the following principal properties at December 31, 2011:

General use of property	Location	Area in square feet
Warehouse/Office	Kirkwood, New York, USA		524,000
Warehouse/Office	Pittston, Pennsylvania, USA		406,000
Office	Iowa City, Iowa, USA		310,000
Warehouse/Office	Old Tappan, New Jersey, USA		212,041
Warehouse/Office	Cedar Rapids, Iowa, USA		205,000
Office	Southwark, London, UK		155,000
Office	Hadley, Massachusetts, USA		137,070
Printing	Owatonna, Minnesota, USA		128,000

20

We lease the following principal properties at December 31, 2011:

General use of property	Location	Area in square feet
Warehouse/Office	Lebanon, Indiana, USA		1,091,435
Warehouse/Office	Cranbury, New Jersey, USA		886,747
Warehouse/Office	Indianapolis, Indiana, USA		737,850
Warehouse/Office	San Antonio, Texas, USA		559,258
Office	Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, USA		474,801
Warehouse/Office	Rugby, UK		446,077
Office	New York City, New York, USA		443,229
Office	London, UK		282,923
Warehouse/Office	Newmarket, Ontario, Canada		278,912
Office	Boston, Massachusetts, USA		234,745
Warehouse/Office	Austin, Texas, USA		226,076
Warehouse/Office	Scoresby, Victoria, Australia		197,255
Office	Glenview, Illinois, USA		187,500
Warehouse/Office	Bedfordshire, UK		186,570
Office	Bloomington, Minnesota, USA		153,240
Warehouse/Office	Uttar Pradesh, India		145,041
Office	Boston, Massachusetts, USA		138,112
Office	Harlow, UK		137,857
Office	Chandler, Arizona, USA		135,460
Warehouse/Office	Cedar Rapids, Iowa, USA		119,682
Office	New York City, New York, USA		117,478
Warehouse	San Antonio Zomeyucan, Mexico		113,638
Office	London, UK		112,000
Call Center/Office	Lawrence, Kansas, USA		105,000

Capital Expenditures

See “Item 5. Operating and Financial Review and Prospects — Liquidity and Capital Resources” for description of the Company’s capital expenditure.

ITEM 4A. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

The Company has not received, 180 days or more before the end of the 2011 fiscal year, any written comments from the Securities and Exchange Commission staff regarding its periodic reports under the Exchange Act which remain unresolved.

ITEM 5. OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The following discussion and analysis is based on and should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements, including the related notes, appearing elsewhere in this Annual Report. The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB.

Where this discussion refers to constant currency comparisons, these are estimated by re-calculating the current year results using the exchange rates prevailing for the prior period. The increase or reduction in the value calculated is the estimate of impact of exchange rates. We believe this presentation provides a more useful period to period comparison as changes due solely to changes in exchange rates are eliminated.

21

General overview

Introduction

Sales from continuing operations increased from £5,663m in 2010 to £5,862m in 2011, an increase of 4%. The year on year growth was impacted by exchange rates, in particular the US dollar. The average US dollar exchange rate in 2011 weakened in comparison to sterling in 2010, which had the effect of reducing reported sales in 2011 by £122m when compared to the equivalent figure at constant 2010 rates. When measured at constant 2010 exchange rates, all our businesses contributed to the growth. The Education businesses all benefited from the additional contribution from acquisitions made in 2010 and 2011.

Reported operating profit increased by 65% from £743m in 2010 to £1,226m in 2011. Operating profit in 2011 includes the £412m profit on sale of our 50% interest in FTSE International Limited (FTSE) and after excluding this item the year on year growth was 10%. All of the businesses contributed to this growth through increased sales and further cost efficiencies. This growth would have been higher but for the relative weakness of the US dollar and we estimate that operating profit would have been approximately £13m higher if translated at constant 2010 exchange rates.

Profit before taxation in 2011 of £1,155m compares to a profit before taxation of £670m in 2010. The increase of £485m includes the FTSE sale but also reflects the improved operating performance and a slight reduction in net finance costs. Net finance costs reduced from £73m in 2010 to £71m in 2011. The Group’s net interest payable decreased by £18m in 2011 as the reduction in floating market interest rates on US dollar and sterling borrowings, interest income on deposits in higher yielding currencies and the effect of lower average levels of net debt following the receipt of proceeds from the sale of Interactive Data all contributed to the lower interest charge. Financing related exchange losses of £11m in 2011 compare to a net exchange gain of £9m in 2010. The majority of the loss in 2011 relates to foreign exchange differences on a proportion of the unhedged US dollar proceeds from the Interactive Data sale. In 2010 the gain arose largely from foreign exchange on US dollar denominated debt. Finance income relating to post-retirement plans of £3m in 2011 compares to a charge of £12m in 2010.

In July 2010, Pearson sold its 61% share of Interactive Data Corporation for $2bn. The results of Interactive Data have been included as discontinued operations for the period to 29 July 2010 and in prior periods. Included in discontinued operations in 2010 is the gain on sale of Interactive Data of £1,037m and the attributable tax charge of £306m.

Net cash generated from operations decreased to £1,093m in 2011 from £1,169m in 2010. Cash collections were particularly strong at the end of 2010 and this impacted on collections in early 2011. Cash generation was still strong in 2011 and continues to be helped by our transition to a more digital and service based business where the cash flow profile is more favourable. This transition is also helping to reduce our working capital and on an average basis, the ratio of working capital to sales improved from 20.1% to 16.9%, also reflecting tight working capital management and the favourable working capital profile of acquisitions in 2010 and 2011. Average working capital comprises the average of the monthly carrying values over the relevant 12 month period for inventory, pre-publication costs, debtors and creditors. Net interest paid at £60m in 2011 was £8m below the previous year, reflecting the overall fall in net interest and the timing of interest payments on the bond portfolio. Tax paid excluding the amounts paid on the Interactive Data disposal in 2010 increased to £151m in 2011 compared to £85m in 2010. The increase is due to higher payments in the US following the use of the remaining available losses in 2010 and settlements in the year. Net capital expenditure on property, plant and equipment after proceeds from sales decreased to £58m in 2011 from £76m in 2010. The net cash outflow in respect of businesses and investments acquired was £800m in 2011 and £564m in 2010 whilst the sale of FTSE generated £428m and the sale of Interactive Data in 2010 raised proceeds of £734m net of tax paid. Dividends from joint ventures and associates increased to £30m in 2011 from £23m in 2010. Dividends paid of £298m in 2010 (including £6m paid to non-controlling interests) compares to £319m in 2011 (including £1m paid to non-controlling interests). Overall net borrowings increased by £69m from £430m at the end of 2010 to £499m at the end of 2011 largely due to good cash generation from operations and the proceeds from the FTSE sale which largely offset expenditure on acquisitions, routine capital expenditure, dividend, tax and interest payments.

22

Outlook

The external environment is likely to remain challenging in 2012 in the face of turbulent macroeconomic conditions and rapid structural change in our industries. However, we will once again make progress on our strategic goals of making Pearson more digital, more exposed to fast-growing markets and more directly engaged in helping students succeed. Our 2012 financial results will reflect the sale of our 50% stake in FTSE International (which contributed no sales and £20m of operating profit in 2011) and higher tax rates (after one-off benefits in 2011).

Pearson Education

In Education, we expect to achieve continued growth in 2012. In North America, we anticipate modest growth in higher Education as rapid take-up of our technology and services is partially offset by lower college enrolments and challenging conditions in the market for printed textbooks. We expect our Assessment and Information business to remain resilient as it prepares for the transition to next-generation Common Core assessments. We expect good growth in digital school programs and services, but another tough year for the School textbook publishing industry, which will continue to be affected by pressure on state budgets and delays in purchasing decisions during the transition to the new Common Core standards.

We expect our International education business to show good growth. Austerity measures will continue to affect education spending in much of the developed world, but we see significant opportunity in emerging markets in China, south-east Asia, Latin America, the Middle East and Sub-Saharan Africa — which together accounted for more than 40% of our International education revenues in 2011. Across our education company, we will be integrating acquisitions made in 2011 (and expensing the costs) and making a series of organic investments in fast-growing segments including digital learning, English language teaching and institutional services.

We expect our Professional education business to grow again, benefiting from the continued strength of our worldwide professional testing business. In the UK, government funding pressures and policy change relating to apprenticeships are creating a tough trading environment in professional training.

FT Group

The FT Group’s profits will be lower in 2012 than in 2011, reflecting the sale of our 50% stake in FTSE International and further actions weighted towards the first half of the year to accelerate the shift from print to digital. The Financial Times and The Economist Group (in which Pearson owns a 50% stake) are predicting weak advertising markets but strong growth in digital subscription revenues. Mergermarket will benefit from its high subscription renewal rates, although the outlook for merger and acquisition activity remains uncertain.

The Penguin Group

Penguin has performed strongly in recent years in the context of rapid structural change in the consumer publishing industry. We expect it to perform in line with the overall industry this year, facing tough conditions in the physical bookstore channel but helped by its strong position in digital. ebook revenues accounted for 12% of Penguin revenues worldwide in 2011, up from 6% in 2010, and we expect this percentage to increase significantly again in 2012.

23

Sales information by operating division

The following table shows sales information for each of the past three years by operating division:

	Year Ended December 31
	2011		2010		2009
	£m		£m		£m
Education:
North American		2,584		2,640		2,470
International		1,424		1,234		1,035
Professional		382		333		275
FT Group		427		403		358
Penguin		1,045		1,053		1,002
Total		5,862		5,663		5,140

Sales information by geographic market supplied

The following table shows sales information for each of the past three years by geographic region:

	Year Ended December 31
	2011		2010		2009
	£m		£m		£m
European countries		1,336		1,205		1,081
North America		3,522		3,589		3,344
Asia Pacific		646		577		497
Other countries		358		292		218
Total		5,862		5,663		5,140

Exchange rate fluctuations

We earn a significant proportion of our sales and profits in overseas currencies, principally the US dollar. Sales and profits are translated into sterling in the consolidated financial statements using average rates. The average rate used for the US dollar was £1:$1.60 in 2011, £1:$1.54 in 2010 and £1:$1.57 in 2009. Fluctuations in exchange rates can have a significant impact on our reported sales and profits. In 2011, Pearson generated 57% of its sales in the US (2010: 59%; 2009: 61%). In 2011 we estimate that a five cent change in the average exchange rate between the US dollar and sterling would have had an impact on our reported earnings per share of 1.3p and a five cent change in the closing exchange rate between the US dollar and sterling would have had an impact on shareholders’ funds of approximately £140m. See “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk” for more information. The year-end US dollar rate for 2011 was £1:$1.55 compared to £1:$1.57 for 2010. In terms of the year end rate, the weakening of sterling in comparison to the US dollar in 2011 was less significant than in the previous year and had only a relatively small impact on shareholders’ funds. The net effect of movement in all currencies in 2011 was a decrease in our shareholders’ funds of £44m. The year-end rate for the US dollar in 2010 was £1:$1.57 compared to £1:$1.61 for 2009. The comparative strength of the US dollar, contributed to an overall increase in shareholders’ funds due to exchange movements of £173m in 2010.

Critical accounting policies

Our consolidated financial statements, included in “Item 18. Financial Statements”, are prepared based on the accounting policies described in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements.

24

Certain of our accounting policies require the application of management judgment in selecting assumptions when making significant estimates about matters that are inherently uncertain. Management bases its estimates on historical experience and other assumptions that it believes are reasonable. These policies are described in note 1a(3) in “Item 18. Financial Statements”.

Results of operations

Year ended December 31, 2011 compared to year ended December 31, 2010

Consolidated results of operations

Sales

Our total sales from continuing operations increased by £199m, or 4%, to £5,862m in 2011, from £5,663m in 2010. The increase reflected growth, on a constant exchange rate basis, at all of our businesses together with additional contributions from acquisitions made in both 2010 and 2011. The year on year growth was impacted by movements in exchange rates, particularly in the US dollar. 2011 sales, translated at 2010 average exchange rates, would have been £5,984m.

Pearson Education increased sales by £183m or 4% from £4,207m to £4,390m. The International and Professional businesses both contributed to the increase and were helped by acquisitions made in 2010 and 2011. The North American business saw a sales decline of 2% at reported exchange rates although, in US dollar terms, 2011 sales were ahead of 2010. We estimate that after excluding acquisitions and the negative impact of exchange, Pearson Education sales growth was flat in 2011 compared to 2010.

The US higher education publishing market was broadly level with 2010, according to the Association of American Publishers, with solid growth in public colleges offset by enrolment declines in for-profit colleges following changes in Federal regulations. Pearson gained share, benefiting from its lead in technology and customization, and has now grown faster than the US higher education industry for 13 consecutive years. The US school textbook publishing market declined 9% in 2011, according to the Association of American Publishers. There were several pressures on the industry including weakness in state budgets, a lower new adoption opportunity (total opportunity of $650m in 2011 against $800m in 2010) and delays in purchasing decisions during the transition to the new Common Core standards. Pearson gained share with a strong adoption performance boosted by our blended print-and-digital programs and we took an estimated 37% of new adoptions competed for (or 31% of the total new adoption market). State funding pressures and the transition to Common Core assessments also made market conditions tough for our state assessment and teacher testing businesses; these were offset by good growth in diagnostic and clinical assessments and revenues at our Assessment and Information division grew modestly in 2011.

In 2011, we continued to make significant organic investments in the International Education business expanding the footprint of Wall Street English in China and rolling out our school services business in India whilst incurring significant charges from the integration of acquisitions, most notably of Sistema Educacional Brasiliero (SEB) in Brazil. After excluding the effect of acquisitions we estimate that there was growth of 4% at constant 2010 exchange rates in the International Education business. Professional sales increased in 2011 by 15% although much of this increase was acquisition related mainly due to the full year contribution from Melorio, the UK vocational training business acquired in June 2010 and other smaller acquisitions in 2011. In terms of constant last year exchange rates and after taking out the acquisitions there was still good growth in both the professional testing and professional publishing businesses.

FT Group sales were 6% ahead of last year driven by good underlying growth at both the Financial Times and Mergermarket. Growth at the Financial Times was driven by increases in digital readership and subscriptions, although advertising remained weak and volatile. Mergermarket continued to benefit from its global presence and product breadth which helped to increase usage, grow new sales and produce strong renewal rates.

25

Penguin achieved robust sales and profits in this challenging and rapidly-changing industry environment and gained market share in each of its major markets — the US, the UK and Australia. Market conditions were tough in 2011 following the collapse of two major customers: Borders in the US and the REDGroup in Australia.

Pearson Education, our largest business sector, accounted for 75% of our continuing business sales in 2011 and 74% in 2010. North America continued to be the most significant source of our sales and as a proportion of total continuing sales contributed 60% in 2011 and 63% in 2010.

Cost of goods sold and operating expenses

The following table summarizes our cost of sales and net operating expenses:

	Year Ended December 31
	2011			2010
	£m			£m
Cost of goods sold		2,624			2,588
Distribution costs		273			298
Administration and other expenses		2,342			2,190
Other operating income		(158	)		(115	)
Total		2,457			2,373

Cost of goods sold. Cost of sales consists of costs for raw materials, primarily paper, printing and binding costs, amortization of pre-publication costs, royalty charges and the cost of service provision in the assessment and testing business. Our cost of sales increased by £36m, or 1%, to £2,624m in 2011, from £2,588m in 2010. The increase corresponds to the increase in sales but is a lower percentage of sales as efficiencies and a mix effect has improved gross margins. Cost of sales at 44.8% of sales in 2011 compares to 45.7% in 2010.

Distribution costs. Distribution costs consist primarily of shipping costs, postage and packing. A reduction in costs in 2011 reflects the change in product mix with digital and services businesses incurring less distribution expense.

Administration and other expenses. Our administration and other expenses increased by £152m, or 7%, to £2,342m in 2011, from £2,190m in 2010. As a percentage of sales they remained consistent at approximately 40% in 2011 and 39% in 2010.

Other operating income. Other operating income mainly consists of freight recharges, sub-rights and licensing income and distribution commissions together with income from the sale of assets. Other operating income increased to £158m in 2011 compared to £115m in 2010 largely due to the inclusion in 2011 of a £29m gain on the sale of an investment and an £8m gain on a stepped acquisition in the International Education business.

Profit on sale of associate

On 12 December 2011 the FT Group completed the disposal of its 50% stake in FTSE International Limited (FTSE) realizing a profit on sale of £412m. This profit has been disclosed separately on the face of the income statement.

Share of results of joint ventures and associates

The contribution from our joint ventures and associates decreased from £41m in 2010 to £33m in 2011. The 2010 result included a one off profit relating to a stepped acquisition at FTSE of £12m. The majority of the remainder of the profit comes from our 50% interest in the Economist.

26

Operating profit

The total operating profit increased by £483m, or 65%, to £1,226m in 2011 from £743m in 2010. 2011 operating profit, includes the profit on sale of FTSE of £412m and after excluding this item operating profit in 2011 increased by £71m or 10%.

Operating profit attributable to Pearson Education increased by £63m, or 11%, to £639m in 2011, from £576m in 2010. The increase was attributable to a good performance across all the Education businesses and a contribution from acquisitions. Operating profit attributable to the FT Group after taking out the profit on sale of FTSE increased by £5m, or 8%, to £67m in 2011, from £62m in 2010. The increase reflects the improved profitability from digital businesses despite a weak advertising market and the absence of the £12m one off profit recorded by FTSE in 2010. Operating profit attributable to Penguin showed a small increase of £3m, or 3%, to £108m in 2011, from £105m in 2010.

Net finance costs

Net finance costs decreased from £73m in 2010 to £71m in 2011. Net interest payable was £55m, down from £73m in 2010. Although our fixed rate policy reduces the impact of changes in market interest rates, we were still able to benefit from low average US dollar and sterling interest rates during the year. Year-on-year, average three month LIBOR (weighted for the Group’s net borrowings in US dollars and sterling at each year end) fell by 0.1% to 0.3%. This reduction in floating market interest rates helped drive the Group’s lower interest charge. These low rates, coupled with interest income on deposits in higher yielding currencies created a decrease in the Group’s average net interest payable from 7.9% to 6.5%. The Group’s average net debt fell by £82m, reflecting the timing of the reinvestment of the Interactive Data proceeds during 2011. Finance income relating to post-retirement plans was £3m in 2011 compared to a charge of £12m in 2010.

Also included in net finance costs are finance costs on put options and deferred consideration associated with acquisitions, foreign exchange and other gains and losses. In 2011, the total of these items was a charge of £19m compared to a profit of £12m in 2010. The majority of the loss in 2011 relates to foreign exchange differences on a proportion of the unhedged US dollar proceeds from the Interactive Data sale. In 2010 the gain arose largely from foreign exchange on US dollar denominated debt. For a more detailed discussion of our borrowings and interest expenses see “— Liquidity and Capital Resources — Capital Resources” and “— Borrowings” below and “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk”.

Taxation

The total tax charge in 2011 of £199m represents 17% of pre-tax profits compared to a charge of £146m or 22% of pre-tax profits in 2010. Our overseas profits, which arise mainly in the US, are largely subject to tax at higher rates than that in the UK (which had an effective statutory rate of 26.5% in 2011 and 28% in 2010). The reduction in the tax rate in 2011, however, is largely due to the low tax charge on the gain on disposal of FTSE together with the effect of the prior year adjustments arising from settlements with tax authorities. In total these two items outweighed the favourable effect in 2010 from recognition of tax losses and credits utilised in connection with the Interactive Data sale. The tax charge relating to that sale in July 2010 is included in the loss on discontinued businesses.

Non-controlling interest

In 2011 there are non-controlling interests in the Group’s businesses in South Africa, China and India although none of these are material to the Group numbers. The non-controlling interest in the Group’s Brazilian business, SEB, was bought out in the first half of 2011. The non-controlling interest in 2010 comprises mainly the publicly-held share of Interactive Data for the period to disposal in July 2010.

27

Discontinued operations

There are no discontinued operations in 2011. Discontinued operations in 2010 relate to Interactive Data Corporation. On July 29, 2010, Interactive Data, in which Pearson held a 61% interest, was sold. (Pearson’s share of the sale proceeds was $2bn).

The results of Interactive Data have been included as discontinued operations up to the date of sale on July 29, 2010. Included in discontinued operations in 2010 is Interactive Data’s results for the seven months to the date of sale, the gain on sale of £1,037m and the attributable tax charge of £306m.

Profit for the year

The profit for the financial year in 2011 was £956m compared to a profit in 2010 of £1,300m. The 2010 profit included the contribution from discontinued businesses of £776m (including the gain on sale of Interactive Data) which more than offset the gain on sale of FTSE and improved operating performance from continuing businesses in 2011.

Earnings per ordinary share

The basic earnings per ordinary share, which is defined as the profit for the financial year divided by the weighted average number of shares in issue, was 119.6p in 2011 compared to 161.9p in 2010 based on a weighted average number of shares in issue of 800.2m in 2011 and 801.2m in 2010. The decrease in earnings per share was due to the decrease in profit for 2011 described above and was not significantly affected by the movement in the weighted average number of shares.

The diluted earnings per ordinary share of 119.3p in 2011 and 161.5p in 2010 was not significantly different from the basic earnings per share in those years as the effect of dilutive share options was again not significant.

Exchange rate fluctuations

The weakening of the US dollar and other currencies against sterling on an average basis had an adverse impact on reported sales and profits in 2011 compared to 2010. 2011 sales, translated at 2010 average exchange rates, would have been higher by £122m and operating profit, translated at 2010 average exchange rates, would have been higher by £13m. See “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk” for a discussion regarding our management of exchange rate risks.

Sales and operating profit by division

The following tables summarize our sales and operating profit for each of Pearson’s business segments. Adjusted operating profit is a non-GAAP financial measure and is included as it is a key financial measure used by management to evaluate performance and allocate resources to business segments. See also note 2 of “Item 18. Financial Statements”.

In our adjusted operating profit we have excluded amortization of acquired intangibles and acquisition costs. The amortization of acquired intangibles is the amortization of intangible assets acquired through business combinations and acquisition costs are the direct costs of acquiring those businesses. Neither of these charges are considered to be fully reflective of the underlying performance of the Group. Other net gains and losses that represent profits and losses on the sale of subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and other financial assets are also excluded from adjusted operating profit as they distort the performance of the Group.

28

Adjusted operating profit enables management to more easily track the underlying operational performance of the Group. A reconciliation of operating profit to adjusted operating profit for continuing operations is included in the tables below:

	Year Ended December 31, 2011
£m	North  American Education			International Education			Professional			FT Group			Penguin			Total
Sales		2,584			1,424			382			427			1,045			5,862
		44	%		24	%		7	%		7	%		18	%		100	%
Total operating profit		463			121			55			479			108			1,226
		38	%		10	%		4	%		39	%		9	%		100	%
Add back:
Other net gains and losses		(29	)		6			—			(412	)		—			(435	)
Acquisition costs		2			9			—			1			—			12
Amortization of acquired intangibles		57			60			11			8			3			139
Adjusted operating profit: continuing operations		493			196			66			76			111			942
Adjusted operating profit: discontinued operations		—			—			—			—			—			—
Total adjusted operating profit		493			196			66			76			111			942
		52	%		21	%		7	%		8	%		12	%		100	%

	Year Ended December 31, 2010
£m	North  American Education			International Education			Professional			FT Group			Interactive Data			Penguin			Total
Sales		2,640			1,234			333			403			—			1,053			5,663
		47	%		22	%		6	%		7	%		—			18	%		100	%
Total operating profit		415			119			42			62			—			105			743
		56	%		16	%		6	%		8	%		—			14	%		100	%
Add back:
Other net gains and losses		—			10			—			(12	)		—			—			(2	)
Acquisition costs		1			7			2			1			—			—			11
Amortization of acquired intangibles		53			35			7			9			—			1			105
Adjusted operating profit: continuing operations		469			171			51			60			—			106			857
Adjusted operating profit: discontinued operations		—			—			—			—			81			—			81
Total adjusted operating profit		469			171			51			60			81			106			938
		50	%		18	%		5	%		6	%		9	%		12	%		100	%

North American Education

North American Education sales declined by £56m, or 2%, to £2,584m in 2011, from £2,640m in 2010 and adjusted operating profit increased by £24m, or 5%, to £493m in 2011 from £469m in 2010. The results were affected by the relative weakness of the US dollar, which we estimate decreased sales by £91m and adjusted

29

operating profit by £18m when compared to the equivalent figures at constant 2010 exchange rates. At constant exchange and after taking account of the contribution from acquisitions there was underlying decline in sales of 1% and increase in profits of 8%. Sales growth in the US higher education and assessment and information businesses was offset by a weakness in US school publishing.

The US school textbook publishing market declined 9% in 2011, according to the Association of American Publishers. There were several pressures on the industry including weakness in state budgets, a lower new adoption opportunity (total opportunity of $650m in 2011 against $800m in 2010) and delays in purchasing decisions during the transition to the new Common Core standards. Pearson gained share with a strong adoption performance boosted by our blended print-and-digital programs including Writing Coach, Prentice Hall Math and enVisionMATH. We took an estimated 37% of new adoptions competed for (or 31% of the total new adoption market). During 2011, we acquired Connections Education which operates online K-12 schools in 21 states and a nationwide charter school program. It served 33,200 students in 2011. Connections Academy Schools have consistently high performance ratings, particularly in states focused on measuring growth in student learning. SuccessNet, our online learning platform for school teachers and students, generated more than six million registrations in 2011, up 5% on 2010. The number of assessments taken through SuccessNet increased by 32% to more than 11 million. We continue to develop digital programs, platforms and apps to boost achievement, access and affordability. We launched two major new school programs aimed at meeting rising literacy standards under the Common Core: i-lit and Pearson English Learning System. i-lit is a personalized digital reading program combining our proven literacy model (with many students making two years of literacy growth in a single year), automated assessment capabilities and compelling literature from Penguin and Dorling Kindersley, all delivered through iPads. Pearson English Learning System benchmarks, monitors and tracks both student progress and teacher best practice to boost English language skills. Poptropica is one of the largest virtual worlds for young children in the US and was named by Time as one of ‘The 50 Best Websites of 2011’. Poptropica has up to 9.7 million monthly unique visitors from more than 130 countries.

Revenues at our Assessment and Information division grew modestly in 2011. State funding pressures and the transition to Common Core assessments continued to make market conditions tough for our state assessment and teacher testing businesses; these were offset by good growth in diagnostic and clinical assessments. We signed several important contracts including state-wide student assessment contracts in New York, Kentucky and Arizona; Race to the Top Florida formative assessment; Indiana educator licensing and Ohio pre-service teacher assessment. We also renewed three important contracts, extending our relationships with Virginia and Maryland for state-wide student assessments and with ETS to service state-wide assessments for California. We signed an agreement with Stanford University to provide the capability to deliver the Teacher Performance Assessment (TPA) — a nationally available, web-based performance assessment for measuring the effectiveness of teacher candidates nationally. We delivered 13 million secure online tests in 2011 with strong growth in automated written and spoken assessment scoring volumes. We won the Online Assessment Readiness Tool contract from both the PARCC and SBAC Common Core consortia to help the 45 states prepare for the transition to online assessments. PowerSchool supported more than ten million students, up 6% on 2010, and developed its platform to enable 18 additional languages to be used on the PowerSchool parent portal. Our clinical assessment business grew well boosted by strong growth at AIMSweb, our progress monitoring service which enables early intervention and remediation for struggling students. Usage of AIMSweb increased dramatically with 47 million assessments delivered in 2011, up more than 40%. During 2011, we acquired Schoolnet, a fast-growing and innovative education technology company that aligns assessment, curriculum and other services to help individualise instruction and improve teacher effectiveness. Schoolnet serves more than five million US pre K-12 students through partnerships with districts and states, supporting about one-third of America’s largest cities.

The US higher education publishing market was broadly level with 2010, according to the Association of American Publishers, with solid revenue growth in public colleges offset by enrolment declines in for-profit colleges following changes in Federal regulations. Pearson gained share, benefiting from its lead in technology and customisation, and has now grown faster than the US higher education industry for 13 consecutive years. The pioneering ‘MyLab’ digital learning, homework and assessment programmes grew strongly with student

30

registrations in North America up 22% to almost nine million. Usage continues to grow strongly with graded submissions up 39% to almost 250 million across the globe. Evaluation studies show that the use of MyLab programmes can significantly improve student test scores and institutional efficiency. We developed a new model of enterprise-wide support for online higher education with Arizona State University Online and Ocean Community College. Through these long-term partnerships, Pearson runs the full online learning programmes for these institutions and earns revenues based on the success of the institution and its students. Pearson LearningStudio increased fully-online student enrolments by 20% to ten million. Renewal rates remain high at more than 80% by value with fewer large accounts up for renewal in the year.

Overall adjusted operating margins in the North American Education business were higher at 19.1% in 2011 compared to 17.8% in 2010 with the majority of the increase attributable to further cost efficiencies and the continued success of higher margin digital products.

International Education

International Education sales increased by £190m, or 15%, to £1,424m in 2011, from £1,234m in 2010 and adjusted operating profit increased by £25m, or 15%, to £196m in 2011 from £171m in 2010. The sales results benefited from acquisitions in 2011 and a full year contribution from acquisitions made in 2010.

Our International Education company is active in more than 70 countries. It is a major focus of our strategy, and sales and profits have broadly doubled since 2007. Our strategy is to combine educational content, assessment, technologies and related services to help educational institutions become more effective and their students more successful. We expect to benefit from a series of powerful long-term global trends: increasing public and private spending on education (despite current pressures on public spending in developed markets); growing participation rates; the demand for assessment to provide measures of achievement; the growing technology infrastructure in educational institutions; and the rise of English as a global language. In 2011, we continued to make significant organic investments in expanding the footprint of Wall Street English in China and the roll-out of our school services business in India as well as incurring significant charges from the integration of acquisitions, most notably the school systems business of SEB in Brazil.

Wall Street English, Pearson’s worldwide chain of English language centres for professionals, increased student numbers by 9% to more than 190,000. We opened 19 new centres around the world, bringing the total number close to 450. More than 0.9 million students registered for our MyLab digital learning, homework and assessment programs, an increase of 36%. They included more than 150,000 MyEnglishLab registrations, up 70%, and 28,000 registrations for our high school mathematics program MathXL, a 54% increase. Our Fronter learning management system grew strongly with new contracts won in Malta, Tasmania and Poland. Active users rose by 18% to 1.3 million and their logins by 11% to 154 million. Student test volumes for the Pearson Test of English Academic saw robust growth supported by recognition from almost 1,900 institutions including the Australian Department of Immigration & Citizenship and 95% of UK Universities. The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development chose Pearson to develop a competency and assessment framework for the 2015 cycle of The Programme of International Student Assessment (PISA) tests, one of the world’s most prestigious programmes of international tests.

In China, student enrolments at our Wall Street English centres increased 25% to 53,000, boosted by strong underlying demand and the launch of 11 new centres. In December 2011, we acquired Global Education and Technology Group, a leading provider of test preparation services for English Language and other professional qualifications. Global Education has approximately 450 (115 owned and 335 franchised) learning centres in 150 cities across China. In South Africa we gained share in school publishing, but market conditions were tougher than expected during a year of major curriculum reform. Student enrolments grew strongly at CTI, up 13% to 8,700, which continues to deliver significantly better completion rates than its peers and strong job placement rates of 70%. We delivered half a million secondary textbooks for Physics, Biology and History to all government secondary schools in Uganda, one million Junior African Writer readers to the Ministry of Education

31

in Sierra Leone and almost two million textbooks in five subjects to secondary schools in Zimbabwe. In Brazil, we successfully completed the first stage of the SEB Pearson Sistemas integration with major investments and improvements across the business. Our Virtual Library grew strongly and now reaches two million students across 100 universities, and we entered the K-12 publishing market. In Colombia, we implemented a bilingual teacher training program in several states and in Chile we won a contract to evaluate the national college admissions test. In India, we incurred costs related to the acquisition of TutorVista and invested to grow the business. We have doubled the number of schools managed by TutorVista to 24 and the installations of its multimedia teaching tool Digiclass to approximately 10,000. Vocational and Professional enrolments at our IndiaCan joint venture grew more than 50% to 86,000, with particular strength in spoken English, Chartered Accountancy, Engineering and MBA qualifications. In the Middle East, our performance was boosted by sales of Reading Street and Scott Foresman Math in Saudi Arabian schools; Giancoli Physics and Thomas Calculus along with strong MyLabs uptake in Turkish colleges; and Haeussler Mathematics and Hubert Engineering along with strong MyLab redemptions in Egypt.

Our UK business made solid progress during the year despite significant regulatory and policy changes in its markets, most notably in vocational and general qualifications, apprenticeships and in higher education. We marked more than 5.7 million GCSE, A/AS Level and other examinations with 90% using onscreen technology. We marked more than 3.8 million test scripts for over half a million pupils taking National Curriculum Tests at Key Stage Two in 2011 and have been selected to mark tests in 2012. Our Bug Club digital reading programme for primary schools combines engaging phonics-based books with games, assessments and teacher diagnostic tools to boost reading enjoyment and comprehension. In 2011, more than 145,000 online users in almost 900 schools subscribed to Bug Club online. We acquired EDI plc, a leading provider of education and training qualifications and assessment services, with a strong reputation for the use of information technology to administer learning programmes and deliver on-screen assessments. Registrations for our own BTEC Apprenticeships more than doubled to 80,000 students.

In Australia, we launched our pioneering US digital maths curriculum, enVisionMATH. And we have more local versions in development to bring high quality digital curriculum to new markets across the globe. In Italy, our new digital curriculum helped us gain significant share in lower secondary adoptions and to see good growth overall. In Germany, we acquired Stark Holding, a leading provider of education materials including test preparation resources for pupils and teachers. In Japan, we faced major disruption following the March 2011 tsunami but maintained operations and achieved notable successes, particularly with the Versant Test of Communicative English and the launch of BTEC.

International Education adjusted operating margins declined slightly from 13.9% in 2010 to 13.8% in 2011 as the business incurred additional integration costs from acquisitions.

Professional

Professional sales increased by £49m, or 15%, to £382m in 2011 from £333m in 2010. Adjusted operating profit increased by £15m or 29% to £66m in 2011, from £51m in 2010. Sales growth in the assessment and training businesses was strong and benefited from a full year contribution from the acquisition of Melorio in June 2010.

We continued to see good revenue and profit growth at Pearson VUE, which administered more than seven million tests during the year, benefiting from sales of additional services to customers and contractual fee increases. We won a number of new contracts including the Construction Industry Training Board in the UK, the National Council of Examiners for Engineering and Surveying in the US, and the HP certification examination worldwide. We formed a joint venture with the American Council on Education to develop an online General Educational Development (GED) test aligned with new Common Core standards. The GED test measures an adults’ high school level knowledge and skills in math, reading, writing, science and social science. We launched a new touch-screen theory driving test for the Roads and Transport Authority for Dubai. The test is delivered in Arabic, English and Urdu. The new test follows the opening last year of a new Pearson VUE office in Dubai to meet the Middle East’s demand for computer-based testing.

32

Despite significant regulatory and policy changes in the apprenticeship market, Pearson in Practice successfully graduated its largest IT cohort and launched or enhanced several new apprenticeship programmes in logistics, construction, management and customer service, business and health. We acquired TQ Holdings Ltd which provides technical education and training services to governments, institutions and corporations around the world with particular expertise in skills related to the defence, engineering, oil and gas and construction sectors.

In professional publishing, our resilient performance in the US benefited from the breadth of our publishing and range of revenue streams, from online retail through digital subscriptions. As a result, digital products and services now account for more than 25% of our professional publishing revenues in the US. In some International markets such as Japan, professional publishers continued to face very challenging trading conditions. In the US, we launched MyGraphicsLab which integrates 50 hours of videos, 250 creative projects, 50 presentations and 1,000 quiz questions with real-world assignments to prepare students for the job market.

Overall adjusted operating margins in the Professional business were higher at 17.3% in 2011 compared to 15.3% in 2010 as margins improved following the integration of Melorio in 2010 and continued efficiencies in the Professional publishing business.

FT Group

Sales at FT Group increased by £24m or 6%, from £403m in 2010 to £427m in 2011. Adjusted operating profit increased by £16m, from £60m in 2010 to £76m in 2011. The sales and profit increase is mainly due to increased demand for digital products and was in spite of weakness in the advertising market in the year. The Economist and other joint ventures and associates also contributed to the profit growth.

The FT produced strong and accelerating growth in its digital readership with online subscriptions up 29% to 267,000, 2,000 direct corporate licences and FT.com registered users up 33% to more than four million. Combined paid print and digital circulation reached 600,000 in 2011, the highest circulation in the history of the FT. At the end of 2011, digital subscribers exceeded print circulation in the US for the first time. The Average Daily Global Audience across print and online grew 3% to 2.2 million people worldwide, our largest audience ever. Readership continues to migrate online and to mobile, which now generates 19% of traffic to FT.com. We launched FT web apps optimised for iPad and Android devices including a custom app for India. The web apps provide FT subscribers access to our content online and through mobile devices with a single subscription and data analytics allow us to better serve our customers. Advertising was generally weak and volatile with poor visibility. Growth in online advertising and the luxury category was offset by weakness in corporate advertising. FT Conferences had a very strong year, operating 75 events in 37 cities worldwide. Almost 9,000 senior executives from around the world attended these events. We launched the FT Non-Executive Certificate (in partnership with Pearson LearningStudio and Edexcel) in April 2011, enrolling more than 100 students. The certificate is designed to aid the professionalisation of the sector and increase diversity on UK boards. It is the first fully accredited formal education product for non-executive directors. We extended the breadth and depth of the FT’s premium subscription services through the launch of Brazil Confidential, extending our successful China Confidential franchise into another growth market. Medley Global Advisors (MGA) grew modestly despite challenging conditions for its customers due to new contract wins. Money-Media grew strongly fuelled by an increase in subscriptions and advertising.

Mergermarket’s strong editorial analysis continued to benefit from its global presence and product breadth. Usage increased, new sales grew and renewal rates were strong. Continued volatility in debt markets helped sustain the strong performance of Debtwire whilst volatile equity markets benefited dealReporter’s event-driven strategy. Mergermarket saw strong growth in Asia-Pacific and the Americas while MergerID continued to benefit from a broadening network of users and strong growth in transaction matches. We launched a large number of new products, extending our reach into new geographies (US wealthmonitor, ABS Europe, dealReporter Middle East, dealReporter Russia Desk), new strategies (multi-strategy products), new coverage areas (municipal bonds, dividend arbitrage) and new platforms (mergermarket iPad app).

33

The Economist, in which Pearson owns a 50% stake, increased global weekly circulation by 1% to 1.49 million (for the July — December 2011 ABC period) with an additional digital circulation in excess of 100,000. Total annual online visits increased to 165 million, up 39% on 2010. Business Day and Financial Mail (BDFM), our 50% owned joint venture in South Africa with Avusa, improved profitability with revenue increasing by 10%. The business benefited from growth in advertising and circulation revenues. In December 2011, we sold our 50% stake in FTSE International to the London Stock Exchange for net proceeds of £428m in December 2011: it contributed £20m to Pearson’s operating profit in 2011.

Overall adjusted operating margins at FT Group increased from 14.9% in 2010 to 17.8% in 2011 as efficiencies and changing product mix helped improvements.

The Penguin Group

Penguin sales declined by £8m or 1%, to £1,045m in 2011 from £1,053m in 2010 as the business faced tough conditions in the physical book market but adjusted operating profit was up 5% to £111m in 2011 from £106m in 2010.

Market conditions in 2011 were tough following the collapse of two major customers: Borders in the US and the REDGroup in Australia and New Zealand. Despite this, Penguin achieved robust sales and profits and gained market share in each of its major markets — the US, the UK and Australia. There was a strong and consistent publishing performance across imprints and territories which produced market share gains in our major markets in a very challenging retail environment with the closure of more than 750 stores. Growth in developing markets was boosted by the strength of the direct marketing channel and strong publishing in India, including its first 100,000 copy bestseller (Ravinder Singh’s Can Love Happen Twice?). Global publishing properties such as LEGO^®, Wimpy Kid, Jamie Oliver and Kathryn Stockett’s The Help sold in significant numbers in multiple markets.

ebook revenues doubled on the previous year and accounted for 12% of Penguin revenues worldwide, and more than 20% in the US, in 2011. Since the beginning of 2008, digital downloads of apps and ebooks across the Group have totalled approximately 50 million. Penguin continued to invest in digital innovation, launching more than 100 apps and enhanced ebooks, including Wreck this App, On the Road and Moshi Monsters, and a new global digital-only publishing program, Penguin Shorts. DK launched its first non-travel apps including the award-winning DK Human Body. In January 2012 DK became the first consumer publisher to publish four iBooks2 titles using Apple’s new authoring tool. Penguin continued to invest in direct-to-consumer initiatives including new digital platforms for readers, specifically aNobii in the UK and Bookish in the US. In Australia Penguin acquired the REDGroup’s online business. Penguin also signed its first author through its new self-publishing platform BookCountry. Its websites and social media channels around the world now have a global following of more than 11 million. Penguin continued to leverage Pearson-wide digital platforms to transform its internal publishing processes, enabling faster product development and greater re-use of content.

In the US Penguin published a record 254 New York Times bestsellers including some of its repeat bestselling authors such as Tom Clancy, Patricia Cornwell, Ken Follett, Nora Roberts and Clive Cussler, as well as new talent such as Deborah Harkness, Amor Towles and Eleanor Brown. Kathryn Stockett’s The Help was the bestselling title across the US industry selling five million copies in print and digital in its third year since publication. The Young Readers’ division had another strong year achieving a high of 41 New York Times bestsellers. Penguin UK published 78 top ten bestsellers, an increase of 15 on 2010, including two of the top five industry titles with Jamie Oliver’s 30-Minute Meals and Dawn French’s A Tiny Bit Marvellous, and a robust performance by Penguin Children’s who were named Children’s Publisher of the Year in 2011. For a second consecutive year, Jamie Oliver secured the coveted Christmas number one slot with Jamie’s Great Britain. Jeff Kinney’s new Wimpy Kid title Cabin Fever sold 300,000 copies and was the fastest selling book of 2011. DK’s bestseller success continued in 2011 with its LEGO^® titles dominating the bestseller charts including The LEGO^® Ideas Book, LEGO^® Star Wars Character Encyclopaedia and LEGO^® Star Wars Visual Dictionary.

34

Titles from authors such as Annabel Karmel, Karl Pilkington and Mary Berry and the MasterChef titles also performed strongly. In Australia, Penguin had the two top-selling titles across the industry with Jamie’s 30-Minute Meals and Jeff Kinney’s Cabin Fever and hit number one 24 times through the course of the year.

Penguin adjusted operating margins improved again in 2011 to 10.6% from 10.1% in 2010.

Year ended December 31, 2010 compared to year ended December 31, 2009

Consolidated results of operations

Sales

Our total sales from continuing operations increased by £523m, or 10%, to £5,663m in 2010, from £5,140m in 2009. The increase reflected growth, on a constant exchange rate basis, at all of our businesses together with additional contributions from acquisitions made in both 2009 and 2010. The year on year growth was impacted by movements in exchange rates, particularly in the US dollar. 2010 sales, translated at 2009 average exchange rates, would have been £5,535m.

Pearson Education increased sales by £427m or 11% from £3,780m to £4,207m. The North American, International and Professional businesses all contributed to the increase although the International Education business was helped by acquisitions made in 2009 and 2010 and the Professional business benefited from the acquisition of Melorio in 2010. A high proportion of the increase was also due to exchange. We estimate that after excluding acquisitions, Pearson Education saw sales growth of 5% at constant last year exchange rates. The North American business saw strong growth in Higher Education which again out-performed the market which grew at 7.3% in 2010, according to the Association of American Publishers after benefiting from healthy enrolment growth and good demand for instructional materials. The North American publishing business also gained share in the US school curriculum market as this market returned to growth, benefiting from the stronger new adoption opportunity and in spite of the fact that state budgets remained under pressure. The US school publishing market grew 3.2% according to the Association of American Publishers. Revenues at the US Assessment and Information division were broadly level against 2009. State funding issues produced tough market conditions for our state assessment and teacher licensure testing businesses. This was offset by good growth in clinical and diagnostic assessments. International Education sales also benefited from exchange and a contribution from the acquisitions of Sistema Educacional Brasileiro and Wall Street Institute in 2010 and a full year contribution from the 2009 acquisitions of Wall Street English and Fronter and the increased shareholdings in Longman Nigeria and Maskew Miller Longman. After excluding the effect of acquisitions we estimate that there was growth of 6% at constant last year exchange rates in the International Education business. Professional sales increased in 2010 by 21% although much of this increase was due to the contribution from Melorio, the UK vocational training business acquired in June 2010. In terms of constant last year exchange rates and after taking out the acquisition of Melorio there was still good growth in professional testing and modest growth in the professional publishing business.

FT Group sales were 13% ahead of last year driven by strong growth at the Financial Times with growth in digital readership and subscriptions, helped by good advertising growth in 2010. Mergermarket continued to benefit from an improvement in market conditions and its flexibility in adapting to new client investment strategies which supported a recovery in renewal rates and growth in new business revenues. An increase in global merger and acquisition activity benefited Mergermarket and dealReporter and continued volatility in debt markets helped sustain the strong performance of DebtWire.

Penguin’s sales were up 5% in 2010 and it gained share in its three largest markets, the US, UK and Australia. Growth was also due to the very strong growth in ebooks which accounted for 6% of Penguin revenues worldwide in 2010.

Pearson Education, our largest business sector, accounted for 74% of our continuing business sales in 2010 and 2009. North America continued to be the most significant source of our sales and as a proportion of total continuing sales contributed 63% in 2010 and 65% in 2009.

35

Cost of goods sold and operating expenses

The following table summarizes our cost of sales and net operating expenses:

	Year Ended December 31
	2010			2009
	£m			£m
Cost of goods sold		2,588			2,382
Distribution costs		298			275
Administration and other expenses		2,190			2,014
Other operating income		(115	)		(120	)
Total		2,373			2,169

Cost of goods sold. Cost of sales consists of costs for raw materials, primarily paper, printing and binding costs, amortization of pre-publication costs, royalty charges and the cost of service provision in the assessment and testing business. Our cost of sales increased by £206m, or 9%, to £2,588m in 2010, from £2,382m in 2009. The increase corresponds to the increase in sales with cost of sales at 45.7% of sales in 2010 compared to 46.3% in 2009.

Distribution costs. Distribution costs consist primarily of shipping costs, postage and packing and remain a fairly constant percentage of sales.

Administration and other expenses. Our administration and other expenses increased by £176m, or 9%, to £2,190m in 2010, from £2,014m in 2009. As a percentage of sales they remained consistent at 39% in 2010 and 2009.

Other operating income. Other operating income mainly consists of freight recharges, sub-rights and licensing income and distribution commissions together with income from the sale of assets. Other operating income decreased slightly to £115m in 2010 compared to £120m in 2009.

Share of results of joint ventures and associates

The contribution from our joint ventures and associates increased from £30m in 2009 to £41m in 2010. The 2010 result included a one off profit relating to a stepped acquisition at FTSE of £12m. The majority of the remainder of the profit comes from our 50% interest in the Economist.

Operating profit

The total operating profit increased by £124m, or 20%, to £743m in 2010 from £619m in 2009. 2010 operating profit, translated at 2009 average exchange rates, would have been £37m lower.

Operating profit attributable to Pearson Education increased by £71m, or 14%, to £576m in 2010, from £505m in 2009. The increase was attributable to a strong performance in the US Higher Education business and in the International businesses and due to the positive impact of exchange and a contribution from acquisitions. Operating profit attributable to the FT Group increased by £31m, or 100%, to £62m in 2010, from £31m in 2009. The increase reflects the improved profitability from digital businesses and the pick up in advertising together with the one off profit recorded by FTSE referred to above. Operating profit attributable to Penguin increased by £22m, or 27%, to £105m in 2010, from £83m in 2009. This increase was due to the improved sales performance and improved margins partly due to charges relating to the reorganisation of the business in the UK in 2009.

36

Net finance costs

Net finance costs decreased from £96m in 2009 to £73m in 2010. Net interest payable in 2010 was £73m, down from £86m in 2009. The Group’s net interest payable decreased by £13m in 2010, mainly due to a reduction in average interest rates on our floating US dollar debt and the effect of lower average levels of net debt following the receipt of proceeds from the sale of Interactive Data. Year on year, average three month LIBOR (weighted for the Group’s net borrowings in US dollars and sterling at each year end) fell by 0.3% to 0.4%. This reduction in floating market interest rates drove the Group’s lower interest charge. However the low rates on deposited funds coupled with the impact on the calculation of significantly lower net debt, created an increase in the Group’s average net interest payable of 5.3% to 7.9%. The Group’s average net debt fell by £681m, reflecting the impact of the Interactive Data disposal. Finance charges relating to post-retirement plans were £12m in both 2010 and 2009.

Other net finance costs relating to foreign exchange and short-term fluctuations in the market value of financial instruments included a net foreign exchange loss of £7m in 2009 compared to a gain of £9m in 2010. In 2009 the loss mainly related to losses on cross currency swaps and in 2010 the gain related to exchange on new US dollar borrowing raised in the year. For a more detailed discussion of our borrowings and interest expenses see “— Liquidity and Capital Resources — Capital Resources” and “— Borrowings” below and “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk”.

Taxation

The total tax charge in 2010 of £146m represents 22% of pre-tax profits compared to a charge of £146m or 28% of pre-tax profits in 2009. Our overseas profits, which arise mainly in the US, are largely subject to tax at higher rates than the UK corporation tax rate (which had an effective statutory rate of 28% in 2010 and in 2009). Higher tax rates were partly offset by the recognition of tax losses and credits in the year including pre-acquisition and capital losses that were utilised in connection with the Interactive Data sale. The tax charge relating to that sale in July 2010 is included in the profit on discontinued businesses.

Non-controlling interest

The non-controlling interest in the income statement comprises mainly the publicly-held share of Interactive Data for the period to disposal in July 2010. There are also non-controlling interests in the Group’s businesses in South Africa, Nigeria, China and India although none of these are material to the Group numbers. The non-controlling interest in the Group’s Brazilian business, SEB was bought out in the first half of 2011.

Discontinued operations

On July 29, 2010, Interactive Data, in which Pearson held a 61% interest was sold. (Pearson’s share of the sale proceeds was $2bn.) The results of Interactive Data have been included as discontinued operations up to the date of sale on July 29, 2010. Included in discontinued operations in 2010 is Interactive Data’s results for the seven months to the date of sale, the gain on sale of £1,037m and the attributable tax charge of £306m. The total profit from discontinued operations, after taking account of the above items, was £776m in 2010 compared to £85m in 2009.

Profit for the year

The profit for the financial year in 2010 was £1,300m compared to a profit in 2009 of £462m. The overall increase of £838m was mainly due to the gain on sale of Interactive Data but also due to the improved operating performance and decrease in net finance costs.

Earnings per ordinary share

The basic earnings per ordinary share, which is defined as the profit for the financial year divided by the weighted average number of shares in issue, was 161.9p in 2010 compared to 53.2p in 2009 based on a weighted

37

average number of shares in issue of 801.2m in 2010 and 799.3m in 2009. The increase in earnings per share was due to the increase in profit for 2010 described above and was not significantly affected by the movement in the weighted average number of shares.

The diluted earnings per ordinary share of 161.5p in 2010 and 53.1p in 2009 was not significantly different from the basic earnings per share in those years as the effect of dilutive share options was again not significant.

Exchange rate fluctuations

The strengthening of the US dollar and other currencies against sterling on an average basis had a positive impact on reported sales and profits in 2010 compared to 2009. 2010 sales, translated at 2009 average exchange rates, would have been lower by £128m and operating profit, translated at 2009 average exchange rates, would have been lower by £37m. See “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk” for a discussion regarding our management of exchange rate risks.

Sales and operating profit by division

The following tables summarize our sales and operating profit for each of Pearson’s business segments. Adjusted operating profit is a non-GAAP financial measure and is included as it is a key financial measure used by management to evaluate performance and allocate resources to business segments. See also note 2 of “Item 18. Financial Statements”.

In our adjusted operating profit we have excluded amortization of acquired intangibles and acquisition costs. The amortization of acquired intangibles is the amortization of intangible assets acquired through business combinations and acquisition costs are the direct costs of acquiring those businesses. Neither of these charges are considered to be fully reflective of the underlying performance of the Group. Other net gains and losses that represent profits and losses on the sale of subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and other financial assets are excluded from adjusted operating profit as they distort the performance of the Group.

Adjusted operating profit enables management to more easily track the underlying operational performance of the Group. A reconciliation of operating profit to adjusted operating profit for continuing operations is included in the tables below:

	Year Ended December 31, 2010
£m	North  American Education			International Education			Professional			FT Group			Interactive Data			Penguin			Total
Sales		2,640			1,234			333			403			—			1,053			5,663
		47	%		22	%		6	%		7	%		—			18	%		100	%
Total operating profit		415			119			42			62			—			105			743
		56	%		16	%		6	%		8	%		—			14	%		100	%
Add back:
Other net gains and losses		—			10			—			(12	)		—			—			(2	)
Acquisition costs		1			7			2			1			—			—			11
Amortization of acquired intangibles		53			35			7			9			—			1			105
Adjusted operating profit: continuing operations		469			171			51			60			—			106			857
Adjusted operating profit: discontinued operations		—			—			—			—			81			—			81
Total adjusted operating profit		469			171			51			60			81			106			938
		50	%		18	%		5	%		6	%		9	%		12	%		100	%

38

	Year Ended December 31, 2009
£m	North  American Education			International Education			Professional			FT Group			Interactive Data			Penguin			Total
Sales		2,470			1,035			275			358			—			1,002			5,140
		48	%		20	%		6	%		7	%		—			19	%		100	%
Total operating profit		354			109			42			31			—			83			619
		57	%		18	%		7	%		5	%		—			13	%		100	%
Add back:
Amortization of acquired intangibles		49			32			1			8			—			1			91
Adjusted operating profit: continuing operations		403			141			43			39			—			84			710
Adjusted operating profit: discontinued operations		—			—			—			—			148			—			148
Total adjusted operating profit		403			141			43			39			148			84			858
		47	%		16	%		5	%		5	%		17	%		10	%		100	%

North American Education

North American Education sales increased by £170m, or 7%, to £2,640m in 2010, from £2,470m in 2009 and adjusted operating profit increased by £66m, or 16%, to £469m in 2010 from £403m in 2009. The results were affected by the relative strength of the US dollar, which we estimate increased sales by £53m and adjusted operating profit by £10m when compared to the equivalent figures at constant 2009 exchange rates. At constant exchange and after taking account of the contribution from acquisitions there was underlying growth in sales of 4% and profits of 12%. Growth was driven by the US Higher Education business.

The US School publishing market grew 3.2% in 2010, according to the Association of American Publishers. State budgets continue to be under pressure but the industry returned to growth, benefiting from the stronger new adoption opportunity this year (total opportunity of $800m in 2010 against $500m in 2009). The US School curriculum business gained share with a strong performance from enVisionMATH, our digital math curriculum. Successnet, our online learning platform for teachers and students which supports Pearson’s digital instruction, assessment and remediation programs, grew strongly, achieving almost 6 million registrations in 2010, up 33% on 2009, with the number of assessments taken through the system rising 53% to more than 8m. We continued to develop digital programs, platforms and mobile apps to boost achievement and to increase access and affordability. We successfully launched three major new school programs: digits, our digital middle school math program, which provides services for teachers including embedded assessment, differentiation of students and automation of administrative tasks; Writing Coach which is a blended print and online program that helps middle and high school students in writing and grammar with personalized assignments and grading; and Online Learning Exchange which is an open education resource that allows teachers to create personalized digital learning programs using standards-based Pearson content as well as teacher-generated material. Poptropica is the largest virtual world for young children in the US with average monthly unique visitors growing by 40% to 8.1m from more than 100 countries and speaking more than 70 languages. Poptropica launched seven new islands and was the fifth most searched-for video game on Google.com in 2010. In September 2010 we acquired America’s Choice to boost Pearson’s services in school reform, a major focus of the US education department. America’s Choice brings together instruction, assessment, leadership development, professional development, coaching and ongoing consulting services.

39

Revenues at our US Assessment & Information division were broadly level against 2009. State funding pressures produced tough market conditions for our state assessment and teacher licensure testing businesses. This was offset by good growth in clinical and diagnostic assessments. We saw good profit growth at Assessment and Information as we benefited from a shift to premium products and further efficiencies generated from the integration of the Harcourt Assessment business. We renewed two important contracts, extending our long-standing relationships with the College Board to administer the SATs and with the Texas Education Agency to administer state-wide student assessments. We continued to achieve strong growth in secure online testing, delivering 13.3 million secure online tests in 2010, up 41% over 2009. Our market leading student information systems business in the US continued to achieve rapid organic growth further boosted by the acquisition of Administrative Assistants Limited in 2010. We now support almost 16 million US students, an increase of 49% over 2009. We achieved strong growth with AIMSWEB, our progress monitoring service which enables early intervention and remediation for struggling students. AIMSWEB supported almost four million students, an increase of more than 20% in 2010.

The US Higher Education publishing market grew 7.3% in 2010, according to the Association of American Publishers with the industry benefiting from healthy enrolment growth and good demand for instructional materials. Pearson gained share from its lead in technology and customisation. Our US Higher Education business has now grown faster than its industry for 12 consecutive years. The pioneering ‘MyLab’ digital learning, homework and assessment programs again grew strongly with student registrations up 32% to more than 7.3m in North America. We launched LearningStudio which provides a broad suite of learning management technologies including eCollege and Fronter. LearningStudio increased fully online enrolments by 54% to 8.3m in North America. Renewal rates remained high at approximately 90% by value.

Overall adjusted operating margins in the North American Education business were higher at 17.8% in 2010 compared to 16.3% in 2009 with the majority of the increase attributable to cost efficiencies and the relative success of higher margin digital products.

International Education

International Education sales increased by £199m, or 19%, to £1,234m in 2010, from £1,035m in 2009 and adjusted operating profit increased by £30m, or 21%, to £171m in 2010 from £141m in 2009. The sales results benefit from exchange gains and a full year contribution from acquisitions made in 2009.

The International Education business was active in more than 70 countries in 2010. More than 670,000 students outside America used our MyLab digital learning, homework and assessment programs, an increase of more than 40%. They included 150,000 users of our online English-language products MyEnglishLabs and MyNorthStarLab, a 170% increase. Our eCollege learning management system won new contracts in Malaysia and Colombia. Our Fronter learning management system continued to grow strongly with unique registration rising more than 20% to 1.1 million students in more than 8,700 schools, colleges and universities around the world. Pearson Learning Solutions, which combines products and services from across Pearson to deliver a systematic approach to improving student performance, won new contracts in South Africa, Malta, Vietnam and the UK. During the year, the International Education business acquired Wall Street Institute (WSI), which provides premium spoken English training for adults, for $101m in cash. In 2010 WSI had about 340 franchised learning centers in 25 territories in Asia, Europe, the Middle East and Africa. The acquisition reunites Wall Street Institute with Wall Street English, the Chinese arm of the company acquired by Pearson in 2009.

In the UK, BTEC, our flagship vocational qualification, attracted more than 1.4 million student registrations, up 28% on 2009. Registrations for our NVQ work-based learning qualification grew 45% to more than 165,000, and we introduced the BTEC Apprenticeship to serve the work-based learning market. We marked more than 5.4 million A/AS Level and GCSE and Diploma scripts in the 2009-2010 academic year, with 90% now marked onscreen. Pearson marked and delivered 3.4 million tests in six weeks for the National Curriculum Tests at Key Stage 2. We established a new school improvement business in the UK, which will work with schools to help them train teachers, improve strategic planning and structure teaching methods.

40

In Italy, adoption of our Linx digital secondary science program increased three-fold, helping Pearson to grow strongly and become joint market leader for combined lower and upper secondary education. Linx is built around content from our North American science programs customized for the Italian market. We began to develop a broader range and depth of digital products and services, including teacher training, to personalize learning and increase educational effectiveness. In the Netherlands, we launched iPockets, the first fully digital Early English course for 4-8 year-olds in Primary Education. The course is 100% digital and subscription based and customized for the Dutch market.

In South Africa’s Western Cape province, we won a three-year contract to prepare, administer and report all Grade 9 student assessments. The tests focus on both individual student results and the systemic performance of schools and districts. Pearson won new national contracts in Ethiopia, to supply 2.9 million Biology, Physics and English learning materials for Senior Secondary Grades 9 to 12. In Zimbabwe, we were awarded a contract by UNICEF to deliver 13.5 million textbooks to children in Grades 1 to 7 in Mathematics, Environmental Science, English, Shona and Ndebele.

We generated strong growth in the Gulf region in higher education with integrated technology products in Business & Economics and Science. Student enrolments at our Wall Street English schools in China increased by 27% and we announced plans to open 50 new English language centers in China over the next three to five years, adding to the 66 centers and schools already operating under the Wall Street English and Longman English brands

Pearson announced its strategic partnership with SEB in Brazil to provide services to its educational institutions and to acquire its school learning systems (“sistema”) business for $517m. A sistema is an integrated learning system incorporating curriculum design, teacher support and training, print and digital content, technology platforms, assessment and other services. In 2010 SEB’s sistemas served more than 450,000 students across both private and public schools. Our School Curriculum business grew strongly, particularly in Mexico, Colombia, Chile and Peru, as we continued to build our locally developed materials as well as Spanish language adaptations of US school programmes. There was strong growth of English Language Teaching materials across Latin America underpinned by performance in Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Chile, Dominican Republic and Peru.

International Education adjusted operating margins improved slightly from 13.6% in 2009 to 13.9% in 2010.

Professional

Professional sales increased by £58m, or 21%, to £333m in 2010 from £275m in 2009. Adjusted operating profit increased by £8m or 19% to £51m in 2010, from £43m in 2009. Sales growth in the assessment and training businesses was strong and benefited from the acquisition of Melorio in June 2010.

In professional testing we continued to see good growth at Pearson VUE which administered more than 8 million tests in 2010, up 3% on 2009. Average revenues per test increased in 2010 as we develop a broader range of services and enhance our systems and assessments to meet our customer’s needs. Pearson VUE renewed a number of major contracts including the Driving Standards Agency (DSA) of Great Britain and the Driver & Vehicle Agency (DVA) of Northern Ireland; Cisco; and Colorado Department of Regulatory Agencies. We also won a number of new contracts to deliver computer-based tests in the US, UK, UAE, Saudi Arabia, Egypt and Bahrain, covering the real estate, accountancy, legal, healthcare, skills and finance sectors.

In professional training, we acquired Melorio plc, one of the UK’s leading vocational training groups, for £98m, supporting our vocational education strategy by combining Melorio’s training delivery skills with our existing complementary strengths in educational publishing, technology and assessments. Melorio traded well in the second half of the year securing a number of large key contracts for training delivery, and successfully graduating and placing the largest IT graduate cohort in the history of the business. Our investment in systems, streamlining the course offering and training centres and back office integration are all on track.

41

Our Professional publishing business was level in 2010 with steady margins as strong growth in digital products and services offset continued challenging trading conditions in the retail market and a planned reduction in the number of print titles published. We launched online learning products with customisable content, assessment and personalised study paths and also delivered 450 hours of technical training through online subscriptions for the IT certification market. We developed applications for social networks and mobile devices to extend the reach and accessibility of our content and videos available within our Safari Books Online platform.

Overall adjusted operating margins in the Professional business were slightly lower at 15.3% in 2010 compared to 15.6% in 2009 as margins were impacted by the acquisition of Melorio.

FT Group

Sales at FT Group increased by £45m or 13%, from £358m in 2009 to £403m in 2010. Adjusted operating profit increased by £21m, from £39m in 2009 to £60m in 2010. The sales and profit increase is mainly from the Financial Times which saw increased demand for digital products and a pick up in advertising in the year. The Economist and other joint ventures and associates also contributed to the profit growth.

The Financial Times saw strong and accelerating growth in digital readership with digital subscriptions up over 50% to 207,000, more than 1,000 direct corporate customers and registered users up 79% to more than 3 million. It generated over 900,000 downloads of FT apps on mobile phones and tablet devices and won a prestigious Apple Design Award for its iPad app. The FT’s combined paid print and digital circulation reached 597,000 in the fourth quarter of 2010. After weak advertising markets in 2009, we saw good advertising growth in 2010 although the visibility for advertising revenues is poor. We extended the breadth and depth of FT’s premium subscription services through the launch of FT Tilt, focused on emerging markets; the launch of MandateWire US, extending the reach of this successful European brand into new markets; and the acquisition of Medley Global Advisors, a premier provider of macro policy intelligence.

Mergermarket benefited from improving market conditions and its flexibility in adapting to new client investment strategies, which supported stronger renewal rates and new business revenues. An increase in global merger and acquisition activity benefited Mergermarket and dealReporter; while continued volatility in debt markets helped sustain the strong performance of DebtWire. We saw strong growth in developing markets supported by new product launches including our first local language version of Mergermarket in China. In March 2010 we acquired Xtract research, which provides bond covenant data to allow investors to understand how covenants might impact on valuation.

The Economist, in which Pearson owns a 50% stake, increased global weekly circulation by 3.7% to 1.47 million (for the July-December 2010 ABC period) and total annual online visits increased to 118 million, up 21% on 2009. FTSE, our 50% owned joint venture with the London Stock Exchange, increased revenues by 20% and acquired the remaining 50% of FXI, FTSE’s joint venture with Xinhua Finance in China. Business Day and Financial Mail (BDFM), our 50% owned joint-venture in South Africa with Avusa, returned to profitability with revenue increasing by 5%. The business benefited from a recovery in advertising and the closure of non-profitable operations.

Overall adjusted operating margins at FT Group increased from 10.9% in 2009 to 14.9% in 2010 as advertising revenue fell through to the bottom line.

The Penguin Group

Penguin sales increased by £51m or 5%, to £1,053m in 2010 from £1,002m in 2009 and adjusted operating profit was up 26% to £106m in 2010 from £84m in 2009. Both sales and adjusted operating profit were affected by the stronger US dollar which we estimate increased sales by £32m and adjusted operating profit by £13m when compared to the equivalent figures at constant 2009 exchange rates. In 2010, Penguin benefited from a

42

series of organisational changes in the UK made in 2009. These were designed to strengthen its publishing, reduce costs and accelerate the transition to digital production, sales channels and formats and to lower cost markets for design and production. Penguin’s 2009 results include approximately £9m of charges relating to these organisational changes.

Penguin saw a strong and consistent publishing performance across imprints and territories producing market share gains in the US, UK and Australia, our three largest markets. Strong growth in developing markets was boosted by the launch of new imprints and the increasing breadth and depth of our local publishing programs in India, China and South Africa. There was continued investment in global publishing with the launch of Penguin’s Classics in Portuguese and Arabic, joining existing Mandarin and Korean editions, the launch in India of a new imprint in partnership with bestselling author Shobhaa De, and the continued international roll-out of our non-fiction imprint Allen Lane in Canada.

ebook sales were up 182% on the previous year and in 2010 accounted for 6% of Penguin revenues worldwide. We accelerated our investment in digital products and innovation with new app releases in the children’s market including Spot, Peppa Pig, The Little Engine That Could, Ladybird’s Babytouch and the Mad Libs app, which was named one of the best apps at the 2010 E-Book Summit. For adults, we launched the groundbreaking myFry app; published the amplified ebook of Ken Follett’s international bestselling novel The Pillars of the Earth, featuring video, art and music from the original TV series; and we introduced ten DK Eyewitness Top Ten Travel Guides apps. Penguin continued to invest to transform its internal publishing processes onto Pearson-wide digital platforms enabling faster product development and more efficient creation and re-use of content.

Penguin performed strongly in the US with a broad range of number one bestsellers from repeat authors such as Charlaine Harris, Nora Roberts, Tom Clancy, Ken Follett and Patricia Cornwell. Kathryn Stockett’s The Help stayed on the New York Times bestseller list for the whole of 2010 and has sold more than three million copies to date. Our outstanding performance in the UK, resulting in our market share in 2010 rising two percentage points to 10%, was led by Jamie Oliver’s 30 Minute Meals. It sold 1.2 million copies to become the UK’s biggest selling non-fiction title of the last decade. Major bestsellers included Stephen Fry’s The Fry Chronicles, Kathryn Stockett’s The Help, and The History of the World in 100 Objects (published in partnership with the BBC and the British Museum), as well as the Percy Jackson and Diary of a Wimpy Kid series. DK produced a very good year thanks in part to its top-performing franchise LEGO (Lego Star Wars Visual Dictionary was on the New York Times bestseller list for the whole of 2010 with 18 weeks at number one). Other bestselling titles included The Masterchef Cookbook, Complete Human Body and Natural History. DK continued to benefit from the organisation changes made in 2009 as well as the ongoing development of its publishing centre in India. Penguin Children’s had an excellent year in both the US, with Penguin Young Readers Group achieving a record 39 New York Times bestsellers, and in the UK, where we reclaimed our position as the number one children’s publisher with significant market share gains.

Penguin adjusted operating margins improved in 2010 to 10.1% from 8.4% in 2009.

Liquidity and capital resources

Cash flows and financing

Net cash generated from operations decreased by £76m (or 7%), to £1,093m in 2011 from £1,169m in 2010. Cash flows are translated at an exchange rate approximating to the rate at the date of cash flow. The decrease in net cash generated from operations in 2011 compared to 2010 reflected a lower year end contribution from working capital movements as pre-publication expenditure matched pre-publication amortization in 2011. In 2010, a strong school adoption year, pre-publication amortization exceeded expenditure. In 2011, the average working capital to sales ratio for our book publishing businesses over the whole year improved to 16.9% from 20.1% in 2010, reflecting the financial characteristics of the ongoing portfolio shift to more digital and service-

43

orientated businesses. Average working capital is the average month end balance in the year of inventory (including pre-publication), receivables and payables. Net cash generated from operations increased by £157m (or 16%), to £1,169m in 2010 from £1,012m in 2009. This increase reflected strong cash contributions, particularly from our education businesses and higher pre-publication amortization relative to expenditure in a strong school adoption year. In 2010, the average working capital to sales ratio for our book publishing businesses improved to 20.1% from 25.1% in 2009, reflecting tight working capital management and the financial impact of the shift to more digital and service-orientated products and businesses.

Net interest paid decreased to £60m in 2011 from £68m in 2010 in line with lower average net debt following receipt of the proceeds from the sale of Interactive Data. Net interest paid decreased to £68m in 2010 from £87m in 2009. The decrease reflects the repayment of a US Dollar bond in 2009 and lower variable interest rates.

Capital expenditure on property, plant and equipment and software intangibles was £144m in 2011, £132m in 2010 and £120m in 2009. Expenditure has been prioritized towards information technology and software to further enhance the digital capability of the Group.

The acquisition of subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates accounted for a cash outflow of £788m in 2011 against £557m in 2010 and £222m in 2009. The increase reflects the re-shaping of the portfolio following the sale of Interactive Data. The principal acquisitions in 2011 were of Schoolnet for £141m, Education Development International for £108m, Connections Education for £244m, Global Education for £97m and TutorVista for £75m. The principal acquisitions in 2010 were of Sistema Educacional Brasileiro for £228m, Melorio for £97m, Wall Street Institute for £64m and America’s Choice for £53m.

The sale of subsidiaries and associates produced a net cash inflow of £422m in 2011 against £734m in 2010 and £nil in 2009. The proceeds in 2011 relate to the sale of the Group’s 50% holding in FTSE International. The proceeds in 2010 relate to the sale of Interactive Data, with proceeds received being £984m and tax paid relating to this disposal of £250m.

The cash outflow from financing of £790m reflects the repayment of a $500m bond, a further 9% increase in the dividend and the final payment of £108m in the stepped acquisition of Sistema Educacional Brasileiro. The cash outflow from financing of £92m in 2010 reflects a further increase in the group dividend and the purchase of treasury shares, with some offset from a $350m US Dollar Note issued in the year. The cash outflow from financing of £366m in 2009 reflects the repayment of one $350m bond, the repayment of borrowings under the Group’s committed borrowing facility and an increase of the dividend in line with earnings. Offsetting this, the Group issued £300m of sterling bonds in the year.

Capital resources

Our borrowings fluctuate by season due to the effect of the school year on the working capital requirements in the educational materials business. Assuming no acquisitions or disposals, our maximum level of net debt normally occurs in July, and our minimum level of net debt normally occurs in December. Based on a review of historical trends in working capital requirements and of forecast monthly balance sheets for the next 12 months, we believe that we have sufficient funds available for the Group’s present requirements, with an appropriate level of headroom given our portfolio of businesses and current plans. Our ability to expand and grow our business in accordance with current plans and to meet long-term capital requirements beyond this 12-month period will depend on many factors, including the rate, if any, at which our cash flow changes and the availability of public and private debt and equity financing, including our ability to secure bank lines of credit. We cannot be certain that additional financing, if required, will be available on terms favorable to us, if at all.

At December 31, 2011, our net debt was £499m compared to net debt of £430m at December 31, 2010. Net debt is defined as all short-term, medium-term and long-term borrowing (including finance leases), less all cash,

44

cash equivalents and liquid resources. Cash equivalents comprise short-term deposits with a maturity of up to 90 days, while liquid resources comprise short-term deposits with maturities of more than 90 days and other marketable instruments which are readily realizable and held on a short-term basis. Short-term, medium-term and long-term borrowing amounted to £2,051m at December 31, 2011, compared to £2,312m at December 31, 2010 reflecting the repayment of the $500m bond in the year and a slight weakening of sterling against the US dollar. At December 31, 2011, cash and liquid resources were £1,369m, compared to £1,736m at December 31, 2010. This decrease is due to the re-investment of the proceeds from the sale of Interactive Data via the various acquisitions above, with some offset from receipt of the proceeds from the sale of FTSE International.

Contractual obligations

The following table summarizes the maturity of our borrowings, our obligations under non-cancelable leases, and pension funding obligations, exclusive of anticipated interest payments.

	At December 31, 2011
	Total		Less than one year		One to two  years		Two to five years		After five years
	£m		£m		£m		£m		£m
Gross borrowings:
Bank loans, overdrafts and commercial paper		78		78		—		—		—
Bonds		1,955		—		233		1,079		643
Finance lease obligations		18		9		8		1		—
Operating lease obligations		1,725		179		164		402		980
UK Pension funding obligations		369		41		41		123		164
Total		4,145		307		446		1,605		1,787

At December 31, 2011 the Group had capital commitments for fixed assets, including finance leases already under contract, of £18m (2010: £13m). There are contingent liabilities in respect of indemnities, warranties and guarantees in relation to former subsidiaries and in respect of guarantees in relation to subsidiaries and associates. In addition there are contingent liabilities in respect of legal and royalty claims. None of these claims or guarantees is expected to result in a material gain or loss.

In 2010, the Group negotiated a new $1,750m committed revolving credit facility which matures in November 2015. The Group is committed to an annual fee of 0.2625% payable quarterly, on the unused amount of this facility.

Off-Balance sheet arrangements

The Group does not have any off-balance sheet arrangements, as defined by the SEC Final Rule 67 (FR-67), “Disclosure in Management’s Discussion and Analysis about Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements and Aggregate Contractual Obligations”, that have or are reasonably likely to have a material current or future effect on the Group’s financial position or results of operations.

Borrowings

The Group finances its operations by a mixture of cash flows from operations, short-term borrowings from banks and commercial paper markets, and longer term loans from banks and capital markets.

45

We have in place a committed revolving credit facility of $1.75bn, which matures in November 2015. At December 31, 2011, the full $1.75bn was available under this facility. This credit facility contains two key covenants measured for each 12 month period ending June 30 and December 31:

We must maintain the ratio of our profit before interest, tax and amortization to our net interest payable at no less than 3:1; and

We must maintain the ratio of our net debt to our EBITDA, which we explain below, at no more than 4:1.

“EBITDA” refers to earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization. We are currently in compliance with these covenants.

Treasury policy

Our treasury policy is described in note 19 of “Item 18. Financial Statements”. For a more detailed discussion of our borrowing and use of derivatives, see “Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk”.

Related parties

There were no significant or unusual related party transactions in 2011, 2010 or 2009. Refer to note 36 in “Item  18. Financial Statements”.

Accounting principles

For a description of our principal accounting policies used refer to note 1 in “Item 18. Financial Statements”.

ITEM 6. DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

Directors and senior management

We are managed by a board of directors and a chief executive who reports to the board and manages through a management committee. We refer to the board of directors and the chairman of the board of directors as our “senior management”.

The following table sets forth information concerning senior management, as of March 2012.

Name	Age		Position
Glen Moreno		68	Chairman
Marjorie Scardino		65	Chief Executive
David Arculus		65	Non-executive Director
Patrick Cescau		63	Senior Independent Director
Will Ethridge		60	Chief Executive, Pearson North American Education
Rona Fairhead		50	Chairman and Chief Executive, The Financial Times Group
Robin Freestone		53	Chief Financial Officer
Susan Fuhrman		67	Non-executive Director
Ken Hydon		67	Non-executive Director
Joshua Lewis		49	Non-executive Director
John Makinson		57	Chairman and Chief Executive, The Penguin Group
Vivienne Cox		52	Non-executive Director

Glen Moreno

Appointed on October 1, 2005. Chairman of the nomination committee and member of the remuneration committee.

46

Glen has more than three decades of experience in business and finance, and is currently deputy chairman of The Financial Reporting Council Limited in the U.K., deputy chairmen and senior independent director at Lloyds Banking Group plc, and non-executive director of Fidelity International Limited. Previously, Glen was senior independent director of Man Group plc and acting chairman of UK Financial Investments Limited, the company set up by HM Treasury to manage the government’s shareholdings in British banks.

Marjorie Scardino

Appointed on January 1, 1997. Member of the nomination committee.

Marjorie brings a range of business, legal and publishing experience to Pearson. Before becoming Pearson CEO, she was chief executive of The Economist Group. Trained as a lawyer, she was a partner in a Savannah, Georgia, law firm and at the same time founded with her husband the Pulitzer Prize-winning Georgia Gazette newspaper. Marjorie is a director of Nokia Corporation, on the non-profit boards of Oxfam and the MacArthur Foundation. In 2003 she was made a Dame of the British Empire and in 2010 was named a fellow of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences.

David Arculus

Appointed on February 28, 2006. Chairman of the remuneration committee and member of the audit and nomination committees.

David has experience in banking, telecommunications and publishing in a long career in business. Currently he is chairman of Aldermore Bank plc, Numis Corporation plc, and the Advisory Board of the British Library and a non-executive director of Telefonica S.A. David’s previous roles include the chairmanship of 02 plc, Severn Trent plc and IPC Group, as well as chief operating officer of United Business Media plc and group managing director of EMAP plc. David served from 2002 to 2006 as chairman of the British government’s Better Regulation Task Force, which worked on reducing burdens on business.

Patrick Cescau

Appointed on April 1, 2002. Member of the audit, remuneration and nomination committees.

Patrick brings to Pearson more than 35 years global business experience in finance, consumer products, retailing and developing and emerging markets. He is the senior independent director of Tesco plc, Britain’s largest retailer, a director of France-based INSEAD, the Business School for the World, and IAG, the International Consolidated Airlines Group, S.A., parent company of British Airways and Spain’s Iberia. He was previously group chief executive of Unilever, the global consumer-goods company whose brands are known throughout the world. Patrick is a trustee of the Leverhulme Trust and chairman of the St. Jude Children Charity. In 2005 he was awarded the ‘Légion d’Honneur’, the highest decoration bestowed by France.

Vivienne Cox

Appointed on January 1, 2012. Member of the audit, remuneration and nomination committees.

Vivienne has wide experience in energy, natural resources and business innovation. She worked for BP plc for 28 years, in Britain and continental Europe, in posts including executive vice president and chief executive of BP’s Gas, Power & Renewables business and its Alternative Energy unit. She is also non-executive director of mining company Rio Tinto plc, energy company BG, the U.K. Department for International Development, and Vallourec, which supplies tubular systems for the energy industry. Vivienne also sits on the board of INSEAD.

47

Will Ethridge

Appointed on May 1, 2008.

Will has three decades of experience in education and educational publishing, including nearly a decade and a half at Pearson where he formerly headed our Higher Education, International and Professional Publishing business. Prior to joining Pearson in 1998, Will was a senior executive at Prentice Hall and Addison Wesley, and before that an editor at Little, Brown and Co where he published in the fields of economics and politics. Will is a board member and former chairman of the Association of American Publishers (AAP) and board chairman of CourseSmart, a consortium of electronic textbook publishers.

Rona Fairhead

Appointed on June 1, 2002.

Rona has wide experience in business, finance, services and manufacturing. She was Pearson’s chief financial officer before beginning her current role in 2006. In addition to the FT Group, Rona heads Pearson’s professional and careers business that includes Pearson VUE (our electronic testing and certification business) and various skills and professional training businesses. She previously held senior management roles at specialty chemicals company ICI plc, and in aerospace with Bombardier/Shorts. She has an MBA from Harvard Business School. Rona currently serves as non-executive director of The Cabinet Office of UK Government and of HSBC Holdings plc, where she chairs the risk committee. She is also a member of the Cambridge University Library Visiting Committee. She was made a Commander of the British Empire in 2012.

Robin Freestone

Appointed on June 12, 2006.

Robin’s experience in management and accounting includes a previous role as group financial controller of Amersham plc (now part of General Electric) and senior financial positions with ICI plc, Zeneca and Henkel UK. He joined Pearson in 2004 as deputy chief financial officer and became chief financial officer in June 2006. Robin qualified as a chartered accountant with Touche Ross (now Deloitte), and is currently a non-executive director and founder shareholder of eChem Limited. Robin sits on the Institute of Chartered Accountants (ICAEW) Financial Reporting Committee and is deputy chairman of the Hundred Group of Finance Directors.

Susan Fuhrman

Appointed on July 27, 2004. Member of the audit and nomination committees.

Susan’s extensive experience in education includes her current role as president of Teachers College at Columbia University, America’s oldest and largest graduate school of education. She is president of the National Academy of Education, and was previously dean of the Graduate School of Education at the University of Pennsylvania and on the board of trustees of the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching.

Ken Hydon

Appointed on February 28, 2006. Chairman of the audit committee and member of the remuneration and nomination committees.

Ken’s experience in finance and business includes roles in electronics, consumer products and healthcare. He is a non-executive director of Reckitt Benckiser Group plc, one of the world’s leading manufacturers and marketers of branded products in household cleaning and health and personal care, retailer Tesco plc and the Royal Berkshire NHS Foundation Trust. Previously, Ken was finance director of Vodafone Group plc and of subsidiaries of Racal Electronics.

48

Joshua Lewis

Appointed on March 1, 2011. Member of the audit and nomination committees.

Joshua’s experience spans finance, education and the development of digital enterprises. He is founder of Salmon River Capital LLC, a New York-based private equity/venture capital firm focused on technology-enabled businesses in education, financial services and other sectors. Over a 25 year private equity/venture capital career, he has been involved in a broad range of successful companies, including several pioneering enterprises in the education sector. In addition he has long been active in the non-profit education sector, with associations including New Leaders and the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation.

John Makinson

Appointed on March 15, 1996.

John’s diverse background spans business, consultancy, financial journalism and publishing. He was finance director of Pearson before heading Penguin, and previously served as managing director of the Financial Times newspaper, where he had earlier served as editor of the popular Lex column. John co-founded Makinson Cowell, an international financial consultancy, and was vice chairman of the U.S. holding company of advertising firm Saatchi & Saatchi. John is chairman of the National Theatre and a trustee of the Institute for Public Policy Research.

Compensation of senior management

It is the role of the remuneration committee (the committee) to approve the remuneration and benefits packages of the executive directors and other members of the Pearson Management Committee. The committee also takes note of the remuneration for those executives with base pay over a certain level, representing approximately the top 50 executives of the company.

Remuneration policy

Our starting point continues to be that total remuneration should reward both short and long-term results, delivering competitive rewards for target performance, but outstanding rewards for exceptional company performance.

Our goal as a company is to make an impact on people’s lives and on society through education and information. Our strategy to achieve that goal is pursued by all Pearson’s businesses in some shape or form and has four parts: long-tern investment in our business; technology; working in fast-growing markets around the world; and efficiency and scale.

An important measure of our strategy is, of course, financial performance. In financial terms, Pearson’s goal is to achieve sustainable growth in three key financial goals — earnings, cash and return on invested capital — and reliable cash returns to our investors through healthy and growing dividends. We believe those are, in concert, good indicators that we are building the long-term value of Pearson. So those measures (or others that contribute to them, such as sales, profit and working capital) form the basis of our annual budgets and plans, and the basis for bonuses and long-term incentives.

Total remuneration is made up of fixed and performance-linked elements, with each element supporting different objectives. Base salary reflects competitive market level, role and individual contribution. Annual incentives motivate the achievement of annual strategic goals. Bonus share matching encourages executive directors and other senior executives to acquire and hold Pearson shares and aligns executives’ and shareholders’ interests. Long-term incentives drive long-term earnings and share price growth and value creation and align executives’ and shareholders’ interests.

49

Consistent with its policy, the committee places considerable emphasis on the performance-linked elements i.e. annual incentives, bonus share matching and long-term incentives. The committee will continue to review the mix of fixed and performance-linked remuneration on an annual basis, consistent with its overall philosophy.

We want our executive directors’ remuneration to be competitive with those of directors and executives in similar positions in comparable companies. For benchmarking purposes we review remuneration by reference to the UK and US market depending on the relevant market or markets for particular jobs. We look separately at three comparator groups:

First, we use a select peer group of FTSE 100 companies with very substantial overseas operations. These companies are of a range of sizes around Pearson, but the method our independent advisers use to make comparisons on remuneration takes this variation in size into account. Secondly, for the US, we use a broad media industry group. And thirdly, we look at the FTSE 20-50, excluding financial services. We use these companies because they represent the wider executive talent pool from which we might expect to recruit externally and the pay market to which we might be vulnerable if our remuneration was not competitive.

Base salary

Our normal policy is to review salaries annually, consistent with the way we benchmark pay and taking into account the approach to pay across the company as a whole.

Allowances and benefits

It is the company’s policy that benefit programs should be competitive in the context of the local labour market, but as an international company we require executives to operate worldwide and recognize that recruitment also operates worldwide.

Annual incentives

The committee establishes the annual incentive plans for the executive directors and the chief executives of the company’s principal operating companies, including performance measures and targets. These plans then become the basis of the annual incentive plans below the level of the principal operating companies, particularly with regard to the performance measures used and the relationship between the relevant business unit operating plans and the incentive targets.

The committee will continue to review the annual incentive plans each year and to revise the performance measures, targets and individual incentive opportunities in light of current conditions.

Annual incentive payments do not form part of pensionable earnings.

Performance Measures

The financial performance measures relate to the company’s main drivers of business performance at both the corporate, operating company and business unit level. Performance is measured separately for each item. For each performance measure, the committee establishes threshold, target and maximum levels of performance for different levels of payout.

A proportion (which for 2012 may be up to 30%) of the total annual incentive opportunity for the executive directors and other members of the Pearson Management Committee is based on performance against personal objectives as agreed with the chief executive (or in this case the chief executive, the chairman). These comprise functional, operational, strategic and non-financial objectives relevant to the executives’ specific areas of responsibility and inter alia may include objectives relating to environmental, social and governance issues.

50

For 2012 the principle financial performance measures for Pearson plc are sales, operating profit (for the operating companies) and growth in underlying earnings per share for continuing operations at constant exchange rates (for Pearson plc), average working capital as a ratio to sales and operating cash flow. The selection and weighting of the performance measures takes into account the strategic objectives and the business priorities relevant to each operating company and to Pearson overall each year.

The individual annual incentive opportunities for the executive directors other than the chief executive are expressed as % of base salary. The committee with the advice of the chief executive determines the aggregate level of annual incentives and individual incentive opportunities taking into account all relevant factors. These factors may include the profitability of the company, individual roles and responsibilities, market annual incentive levels, and the level of stretch in the performance targets.

For 2012, there are no changes to the target and maximum annual incentive opportunities for the chief executive which remain at 100% and 180% respectively, of base salary (as in 2011).

For the other members of the Pearson Management Committee, individual incentive opportunities take into account their membership of that committee and the contribution of their respective businesses or role to Pearson’s overall financial goals. In the case of the executive directors, the target individual incentive opportunity for 2012 is in a range from 80% to 87.5% of base salary (as in 2011). The maximum opportunity remains at twice target (as in 2011).

The annual incentive plans are discretionary and the committee reserves the right to make adjustments to payouts up or down if it believes exceptional factors warrant doing so. The committee may also award individual discretionary incentive payments although no such payments were awarded in respect of 2011.

Name	Pearson plc			Operating company			Personal objectives
Marjorie Scardino		90	%		—			10	%
Will Ethridge		30	%		60	%		10	%
Rona Fairhead		30	%		50	%		20	%
Robin Freestone		80	%		—			20	%
John Makinson		30	%		60	%		10	%

For Pearson plc, the performance measures were sales, earnings per share growth, average working capital to sales ratio and operating cash flow. Sales were between threshold and target. Underlying growth in adjusted earnings per share at constant exchange rates and operating cash flow were between target and maximum. Average working capital to sales ratio was above maximum.

For Pearson Education North America, the performance measures were sales, operating profit, and average working capital as a ratio to sales and operating cash flow. Sales were between threshold and target. Operating profit was between target and maximum. Average working capital to sales ratio and operating cash flow were above maximum.

For FT Publishing, the performance measures were sales, operating profit and operating cash flow. Sales were between target and maximum. Operating profit and operating cash flow were above maximum.

For Professional Assessment and Training, the performance measures were sales, operating profit and operating cash flow. Sales were between threshold and target. Operating profit was below threshold and operating cash flow was between target and maximum.

For Penguin Group, the performance measures were sales, operating profit, operating margin, average working capital as a ratio to sales and operating cash flow. Sales and operating profit were between target and maximum. Operating margin was between threshold and target. Average working capital to sales ratio and operating cash flow were above maximum.

51

Bonus share matching

In 2008, shareholders approved the renewal of the annual bonus share matching plan, which permits executive directors and senior executives around the company to invest up to 50% of any after-tax annual bonus in Pearson shares.

If the participant’s invested shares are held, they are matched subject to earnings per share growth over the three-year performance period on a gross basis i.e. the maximum number of matching shares is equal to the number of shares that could have been acquired with the amount of the pre-tax annual bonus taken in invested shares.

One matching share for every two invested shares held i.e. 50% of the maximum matching award, will be released if the company’s adjusted earnings per share increase in real terms by 3% per annum compound over the three-year performance period. One matching share for every one invested share held i.e. 100% of the maximum matching award, will be released if the company’s adjusted earnings per share increase in real terms by 5% per annum compound over the same period.

For real growth in adjusted earnings per share of between 3% and 5% per annum compound, the rate at which the participant’s invested shares will be matched will be calculated according to a straight-line sliding scale.

Real growth is calculated by reference to the UK Government’s Index of Retail Prices (All Items). We choose to test our earnings per share growth against UK inflation over three years to measure the company’s financial progress over the period to which the entitlement to matching shares relates.

Where matching shares vest in accordance with the plan, participants will also receive additional shares representing the gross value of dividends that would have been paid on the matching shares during the performance period and re-invested.

Long-term incentives

At the AGM in 2011, shareholders approved the renewal of the long-term incentive plan. The plan enables the company to recruit and retain the most able managers worldwide and to ensure their long-term incentives encourage outstanding performance and are competitive in the markets in which we operate.

Under the plan, executive directors, senior executives and other managers can participate in this plan which can deliver restricted stock and/or stock options. Approximately 6% of the company’s employees currently hold awards under this plan.

The aim is to give the committee a range of tools with which to link corporate performance to management’s long-term reward in a flexible way. It is not the committee’s intention to grant stock options in 2012 or for the foreseeable future.

Restricted stock granted to executive directors vests only if stretching corporate performance targets over a specified period have been met. Awards vest on a sliding scale based on performance over the period. There is no retesting. The committee determines the performance measures and targets governing an award of restricted stock prior to grant.

The performance measures that will apply for the executive directors for awards in 2012 and subsequent years will continue to be focused on delivering and improving returns to shareholders. These measures, which have applied since 2004, are relative total shareholder return (TSR), return on invested capital (ROIC) and earnings per share (EPS) growth.

52

Restricted stock may be granted without performance conditions to satisfy recruitment and retention objectives. Restricted stock awards that are not subject to performance conditions will not be granted to any of the current executive directors.

Pearson’s approach to the level of individual awards takes into account a number of factors. First, we take into account the face value of individual awards at the time of grant assuming that the performance targets are met in full. Secondly, we take into account the assessments by our independent advisers of market practice for comparable companies and of directors’ total remuneration relative to the market. And thirdly, we take into account individual roles and responsibilities, and company and individual performance.

For 2012, we reviewed award levels taking into account the value of individual awards and market practice and, as a consequence, reduced the number of shares awarded to executive directors and other members of the Pearson Management Committee compared to practice in recent years.

Where shares vest, in accordance with the plan, participants receive additional shares representing the gross value of dividends that would have been paid on these shares during the performance period and reinvested.

Pearson wishes to encourage executives and managers to build up a long-term holding of shares so as to demonstrate their commitment to the company. To achieve this, for awards of restricted stock that are subject to performance conditions over a three-year period, a percentage of the award (normally 75%) vests at the end of the three-year period. The remainder of the award (normally 25%) only vests if the participant retains the after-tax number of shares that vest at year three for a further two years.

There are limits on the amount of new-issue equity we can use. In any rolling ten-year period, no more than 10% of Pearson equity will be issued, or be capable of being issued, under all Pearson’s share plans, and no more than 5% of Pearson equity will be issued, or be capable of being issued, under executive or discretionary plans. In addition, for existing shares no more than 5% of Pearson equity may be held in trust at any time.

Shareholding policy

The committee expects executive directors to build up a substantial shareholding in the company in line with the policy of encouraging widespread employee ownership. To complement the operation of the company’s long-term incentive arrangements, we will in future, operate formal shareholding guidelines for executive directors. The target holding is 2 times salary for the chief executive and 1.25 times salary for the other executive directors consistent with median practice in FTSE 100 companies that operate such arrangements.

Service agreements

In accordance with long established policy, all continuing executive directors have rolling service agreements under which, other than by termination in accordance with the terms of these agreements, employment continues until retirement.

The committee reviewed the policy on executive service agreements in 2008 and again in 2010. Future executive director service agreements should provide that the company may terminate these agreements by giving no more than 12 months’ notice. As an alternative, the company may at its discretion pay in lieu of that notice. Payment in lieu of notice may be made in instalments and may be subject to mitigation. In the case of the longer serving directors with legacy employment agreements, the compensation payable in circumstances where the company terminates the agreements without notice or cause takes the form of liquidated damages.

There are no special provisions for notice, pay in lieu of notice or liquidated damages in the event of termination of employment in the event of a change of control of Pearson. On termination of employment, executive directors’ entitlements to any vested or unvested awards under Pearson’s discretionary share plans are treated in accordance with the terms of the relevant plan.

53

Retirement benefits

Executive directors participate in the pension arrangements set up for Pearson employees. Marjorie Scardino, Will Ethridge, John Makinson, Rona Fairhead and Robin Freestone will also have other retirement arrangements because of the cap on the amount of benefits that can be provided from the pension arrangements in the US and the UK.

The differences in the arrangements for the current executive directors reflect the different arrangements in the UK and the US and the changes in pension arrangements generally over the periods of their employment. Executive directors are entitled to life insurance cover while in employment, and to a pension in the event of ill-health or disability. A pension for their spouse and/or dependants is also available on death.

In the US, the defined benefit arrangement is the Pearson Inc. Pension Plan. This plan provides a lump sum convertible to an annuity on retirement. The lump sum accrued at 6% of capped compensation until December 31, 2001 when further benefit accruals ceased. Normal retirement age is 65 although early retirement is possible subject to a reduction for early payment. No increases are guaranteed for pensions in payment. There is a spouse’s pension on death in service and the option to provide a death in retirement pension by reducing the member’s pension.

The defined contribution arrangement in the US is a 401(k) plan. At retirement, the account balances will be used to provide benefits. In the event of death before retirement, the account balances will be used to provide benefits for dependants.

In the UK, the pension plan is the Pearson Group Pension Plan and executive directors participate in either the Final Pay or the Money Purchase 2003 section. Normal retirement age is 62, but, subject to company consent, retirement is currently possible from age 55. In the Final Pay section, the accrued pension is reduced on retirement prior to age 60. Pensions in payment are guaranteed to increase each year at 5% or the rise in inflation each year, if lower. Pensions for a member’s spouse, dependant children and/or nominated financial dependant are payable in the event of death. In the Money Purchase 2003 section the account balances are used to provide benefits at retirement. In the event of death before retirement pensions for a member’s spouse, dependant children and/or nominated financial dependant are payable.

Members of the Pearson Group Pension Plan who joined after May 1989 are subject to an upper limit of earnings that can be used for pension purposes, known as the earnings cap. This limit, £108,600 as at April 6, 2006, was abolished by the Finance Act 2004. However the Pearson Group Pension Plan has retained its own ‘cap’, which will increase annually in line with the UK Government’s Index of Retail Prices (All Items). The cap was £129,600 as at April 6, 2011.

As a result of the UK Government’s A-Day changes effective from April 2006, UK executive directors and other members of the Pearson Group Pension Plan who are, or become, affected by the lifetime allowance are provided with a cash supplement as an alternative to further accrual of pension benefits on a basis that is broadly cost neutral to the company.

Effective from 6 April 2011, the annual allowance (i.e. the maximum amount of pension saving that benefits from tax relief each year) reduced from £225,000 to £50,000. Effective 6 April 2011, the lifetime allowance (i.e. the maximum amount of pension and/ or lump sum that can benefit from tax relief) reduced from £1.8million to £1.5million.

Marjorie Scardino

Marjorie Scardino participates in the Pearson Inc. Pension Plan and the approved 401(k) plan.

Since 2010, additional pension benefits are provided through: a taxable and non-pensionable cash supplement in place of the unfunded plan; a funded defined contribution plan approved by HM Revenue and

54

Customs (HMRC) as a corresponding plan; and amounts in the legacy unfunded plan. In aggregate, the cash supplement and contributions to the funded plan are based on a percentage of salary and a fixed cash amount index-linked to inflation. The notional cash balance of the legacy unfunded plan increases annually by a specified notional interest rate. The unfunded plan also provides the opportunity to convert a proportion of this notional cash account into a notional share account reflecting the value of a number of Pearson ordinary shares. The number of shares in the notional share account is determined by reference to the market value of Pearson shares at the date of conversion.

Will Ethridge

Will Ethridge is a member of the Pearson Inc. Pension Plan and the approved 401(k) plan. He also participates in an unfunded, non-qualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan (SERP) that provides an annual accrual of 2% of final average earnings, less benefits accrued in the Pearson Inc. Pension Plan and US Social Security. Additional defined contribution benefits are provided through a funded, non-qualified Excess Plan.

Rona Fairhead

Rona Fairhead is a member of the Pearson Group Pension Plan. Her pension accrual rate is 1/30th of pensionable salary per annum, restricted to the plan earnings cap. Until April 2006, the company also contributed to a Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme (FURBS) on her behalf. Since April 2006, she has received a taxable and non-pensionable cash supplement in replacement of the FURBS.

Robin Freestone

Robin Freestone is a member of the Money Purchase 2003 section of the Pearson Group Pension Plan. Company contributions are 16% of pensionable salary per annum, restricted to the plan earnings cap. Until April 2006, the company also contributed to a Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme (FURBS) on his behalf. Since April 2006, he has received a taxable and non-pensionable cash supplement in replacement of the FURBS.

John Makinson

John Makinson is a member of the Pearson Group Pension Plan under which his pensionable salary is restricted to the plan earnings cap. The company ceased contributions on December 31, 2001 to his FURBS arrangement. During 2002 it set up an Unfunded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme (UURBS) for him. The UURBS tops up the pension payable from the Pearson Group Pension Plan and the closed FURBS to target a pension of two-thirds of a revalued base salary on retirement at age 62. The revalued base salary is defined as £450,000 effective at June 1, 2002, increased at January 1, each year by reference to the increase in the UK Government’s Index of Retail Prices (All Items). In the event of his death a pension from the Pearson Group Pension Plan, the FURBS and the UURBS will be paid to his spouse or nominated financial dependant. Early retirement is currently possible from age 55, with company consent.

The pension is reduced to reflect the shorter service, and before age 60, further reduced for early payment.

Executive directors’ non-executive directorships

Our policy is that executive directors may, by agreement with the board, serve as non-executives of other companies and retain any fees payable for their services.

The following executive directors served as non-executive directors elsewhere and received fees or other benefits for the period covered by this report as follows: Marjorie Scardino (Nokia Corporation and MacArthur Foundation); Rona Fairhead (HSBC Holdings plc).

55

Chairman’s remuneration

Our policy is that the chairman’s pay should be set at a level that is competitive with those of chairmen in similar positions in comparable companies. He is not entitled to any annual or long-term incentive, retirement or other benefits.

The committee reviewed the chairman’s remuneration in 2010. In the light of this review, the board approved the committee’s recommendation that the chairman’s remuneration be increased to £500,000 per year with effect from 1 April 2011. The next review will take place in 2014.

Non-executive directors

Fees for non-executive directors are determined by the full board having regard to market practice and within the restrictions contained in Pearson’s Articles of Association. Non-executive directors receive no other pay or benefits (other than reimbursement for expenses incurred in connection with their directorship of Pearson) and do not participate in Pearson’s equity-based incentive plans.

With effect from July 1, 2010, the structure and fees are as follows:

	Fees payable from July 1, 2010 (£)
Non-executive director fee		65,000
Chairmanship of audit committee		25,000
Chairmanship of remuneration committee		20,000
Membership of audit committee		10,000
Membership of remuneration committee		5,000
Senior independent director		20,000

A minimum of 25% of the basic fee is paid in Pearson shares that the non-executive directors have committed to retain for the period of their directorships.

Non-executive directors serve Pearson under letters of appointment and do not have service contracts. There is no entitlement to compensation on the termination of their directorships.

Remuneration of senior management

Excluding contributions to pension funds and related benefits, senior management remuneration for 2011 was as follows:

	Salaries/ Fees		Annual Incentive		Allowances(1)		Benefits(2+3)		Total
	£000		£000		£000		£000		£000
Non-executive Chairman
Glen Moreno		488		—		—		—		488
Executive directors
Marjorie Scardino		993		1,353		73		36		2,455
Will Ethridge		652		738		—		—		1,390
Rona Fairhead		529		440		12		18		999
Robin Freestone		500		580		7		7		1,094
John Makinson		549		641		224		3		1,417
Senior management as a group		3,711		3,752		316		64		7,843

Notes:

(1) Allowances for Marjorie Scardino include £47,120 in respect of housing costs and a US payroll supplement of £12,551. John Makinson is entitled to a location and market premium in relation to the management of the business of the Penguin Group in the US and received £210,464 for 2011.

56

(2) Benefits include company car, car allowance and UK health care premiums. US health and welfare benefits for Marjorie Scardino and Will Ethridge are self-insured and the company cost, after employee contributions, is tax free to employees. For Marjorie Scardino, benefits include £33,310 for pension planning and financial advice. Marjorie Scardino, Rona Fairhead and John Makinson have the use of a chauffeur.

(3) No amounts as compensation for loss of office and no expense allowances chargeable to UK income tax were paid during the year.

Share options of senior management

This table sets forth for each director the number of share options held as of December 31, 2011 as well as the exercise price, rounded to the nearest whole pence/cent, and the range of expiration dates of these options.

Director	Number of Options		(2)		Exercise Price		Earliest Exercise  Date		Expiry Date
Marjorie Scardino		1,672		a		547.2p		08/01/12		02/01/13
Total		1,672
Rona Fairhead		2,371		a		690.4p		08/01/12		02/01/13
Total		2,371

(1) No variations to the terms and conditions of share options were made during the year.

(2) The plan is described below.

a Worldwide save for shares — The acquisition of shares under the worldwide save for shares plan is not subject to the satisfaction of a performance target.

(3) Marjorie Scardino contributes US$1,000 per month (the maximum allowed) to the US employee stock purchase plan. The terms of this plan allow participants to make monthly contributions for 6 month periods and to acquire shares twice annually at the end of these periods at a price that is the lower of the market price at the beginning or the end of each period, both less 15%.

(4) The market price on December 31, 2011 was 1,210p per share and the range during the year was 983p to 1,222p.

Share ownership of senior management

The table below sets forth the number of ordinary shares and restricted shares held by each of our directors as at February 29, 2012. Additional information with respect to share options held by, and bonus awards for, these persons is set out above in “Remuneration of Senior Management” and “Share Options of Senior Management”. The total number of ordinary shares held by senior management as of February 29, 2012 was 3,127,095 representing less than 1% of the issued share capital on February 29, 2012.

As at February 29, 2012	Ordinary shares(1)		Restricted shares(2)
Glen Moreno		150,000		—
Marjorie Scardino		1,346,618		1,547,980
David Arculus		14,798		—
Patrick Cescau		7,117		—
Will Ethridge		405,295		638,357
Rona Fairhead		425,023		469,218
Robin Freestone		308,731		529,535
Susan Fuhrman		12,927		—
Ken Hydon		14,028		—
John Makinson		438,667		424,218
Joshua Lewis		3,891		—

57

Notes:

(1) Ordinary shares include both ordinary shares listed on the London Stock Exchange and American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The figures include both shares and ADRs acquired by individuals investing part of their own after-tax annual bonus in Pearson shares under the annual bonus share matching plan.

(2) From 2004, Marjorie Scardino is also deemed to be interested in a further number of shares under her unfunded pension arrangement described in this report, which provides the opportunity to convert a proportion of her notional cash account into a notional share account reflecting the value of a number of Pearson shares.

(3) The register of directors’ interests (which is open to inspection during normal office hours) contains full details of directors’ shareholdings and options to subscribe for shares. The market price on December 31, 2011 was 1,210p per share and the range during the year was 983p to 1,222p.

(4) At December 31, 2011, Patrick Cescau held 168,000 Pearson bonds.

(5) Ordinary shares do not include any shares vested but held pending release under a restricted share plan.

Employee share ownership plans

Worldwide save for shares and US employee share purchase plans

In 1998, we introduced a worldwide save for shares plan. Under this plan, our employees around the world have the option to save a portion of their monthly salary over periods of three, five or seven years. At the end of this period, the employee has the option to purchase ordinary shares with the accumulated funds at a purchase price equal to 80% of the market price prevailing at the commencement of the employee’s participation in the plan.

In the United States, this plan operates as a stock purchase plan under Section 423 of the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986. This plan was introduced in 2000 following Pearson’s listing on the New York Stock Exchange. Under it, participants save a portion of their monthly salary over six month periods, at the end of which they have the option to purchase ADRs with their accumulated funds at a purchase price equal to 85% of the lower of the market price prevailing at the beginning or end of the period.

Board practices

Our board currently comprises the chairman, who is a part-time non-executive director, five executive directors and six non-executive directors. Our articles of association provide that at every annual general meeting, one-third of the board of directors, or the number nearest to one-third, shall retire from office. The directors to retire each year are the directors who have been longest in office since their last election or appointment. A retiring director is eligible for re-election. If at any annual general meeting, the place of a retiring director is not filled, the retiring director, if willing, is deemed to have been re-elected, unless at or prior to such meeting it is expressly resolved not to fill the vacated office, or unless a resolution for the re-election of that director has been put to the meeting and lost. Our articles of association also provide that every director be subject to re-appointment by shareholders at the next annual general meeting following their appointment.

However in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code, the board has resolved that all directors should offer themselves for re-election on an annual basis at the company’s annual general meeting. Accordingly, all of the directors will offer themselves for re-election, (or re-appointment in the case of directors who were appointed since the last meeting), at the forthcoming annual general meeting on 27 April 2012.

Pearson is listed on the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”). As a listed non-US issuer, we are required to comply with some of the NYSE’s corporate governance rules, and otherwise must disclose on our website any significant ways in which our corporate governance practices differ from those followed by US companies under the NYSE listing standards. At this time, the Company believes that it is in compliance in all material respects

58

with all the NYSE rules except that the Nomination Committee is not composed entirely of independent directors, and that it is the full board, not the Nomination Committee, that develops and recommends corporate governance principles.

The board of directors has established the following committees, all of which report to the board. Each committee has its own written terms of reference setting out their authority and duties. These can be found on our website (www.pearson.com/investors/shareholder-information/governance).

Audit committee

This committee provides the board with a vehicle to appraise our financial management and reporting and to assess the integrity of our accounting procedures and financial controls. Ken Hydon chairs this committee and its other members are David Arculus, Patrick Cescau, Susan Fuhrman, Joshua Lewis and Vivienne Cox. Ken Hydon is also the designated audit committee financial expert within the meaning of the applicable rules and regulations of the US Securities and Exchange Commission. Our internal and external auditors have direct access to the committee to raise any matter of concern and to report the results of work directed by the committee.

Remuneration committee

This committee meets regularly to decide the remuneration and benefits of the executive directors and the chief executives of our three operating divisions. The committee also recommends the chairman’s remuneration to the board of directors for its decision and reviews management development and succession plans. David Arculus chairs this committee and its other members are Patrick Cescau, Glen Moreno, Ken Hydon and Vivienne Cox.

Nomination committee

This committee meets from time to time as necessary to consider the appointment of new directors. The committee is chaired by Glen Moreno and comprises Marjorie Scardino and all of the non-executive directors.

Employees

The average number of persons employed by us in continuing operations during each of the three fiscal years ended 2011 were as follows:

• 41,521 in fiscal 2011,

• 36,317 in fiscal 2010, and

• 34,705 in fiscal 2009.

We, through our subsidiaries, have entered into collective bargaining agreements with employees in various locations. Our management has no reason to believe that we would not be able to renegotiate any such agreements on satisfactory terms. We encourage employees to contribute actively to the business in the context of their particular job roles and believe that the relations with our employees are generally good.

59

The table set forth below shows for 2011, 2010 and 2009 the average number of persons employed in each of our operating divisions.

Average number employed	2011		2010		2009
North American Education		16,133		14,828		15,606
International Education		13,646		10,713		8,899
Professional		4,561		3,721		2,662
FT Group		2,765		2,557		2,328
Penguin		3,557		3,470		4,163
Other		859		1,028		1,047
Continuing operations		41,521		36,317		34,705

The average number employed in discontinued operations was 2,459 in 2009.

ITEM 7. MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

As at February 29, 2012, the company had been notified under the Financial Services Authority’s Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the following significant voting rights in its shares:

Name of shareholder	Number of ordinary shares held		% of outstanding ordinary shares represented by number of shares held
Legal & General Group plc		32,385,175		3.97	%
Libyan Investment Authority		24,431,000		3.01	%

On February 29, 2012, record holders with registered addresses in the United States held 39,150,685 ADRs, which represented 4.8% of our outstanding ordinary shares. Some of these ADRs are held by nominees and so these numbers may not accurately represent the number of beneficial owners in the United States.

Loans and equity advanced to joint ventures and associates during the year and as at December 31, 2011 are shown in note 12 in “Item 18. Financial Statements.” Dividends receivable from joint ventures and associates are set out in note 12 in “Item 18. Financial Statements”. There were no other related party transactions in 2011.

ITEM 8. FINANCIAL INFORMATION

The financial statements filed as part of this Annual Report are included on pages F-1 through F-68 hereof.

Other than those events described in note 37 in “Item 18. Financial Statements” of this Form 20-F and seasonal fluctuations in borrowings, there has been no significant change to our financial condition or results of operations since December 31, 2011. Our borrowings fluctuate by season due to the effect of the school year on the working capital requirements of the educational book business. Assuming no acquisitions or disposals, our maximum level of net debt normally occurs in July, and our minimum level of net debt normally occurs in December.

Our policy with respect to dividend distributions is described in response to “Item 3. Key Information” above.

ITEM 9. THE OFFER AND LISTING

The principal trading market for our ordinary shares is the London Stock Exchange. Our ordinary shares also trade in the United States in the form of ADSs evidenced by ADRs under a sponsored ADR facility with The Bank of New York Mellon, as depositary. We established this facility in March 1995 and amended it in August 2000 in connection with our New York Stock Exchange listing. Each ADS represents one ordinary share.

60

The ADSs trade on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “PSO”.

The following table sets forth the highest and lowest middle market quotations, which represent the average of closing bid and asked prices, for the ordinary shares, as derived from the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange and the average daily trading volume on the London Stock Exchange:

• on an annual basis for our five most recent fiscal years,

• on a quarterly basis for our most recent quarter and two most recent fiscal years, and

• on a monthly basis for the six most recent months.

	Ordinary shares				Average  daily trading volume
Reference period	High		Low
	(In pence)				(Ordinary shares)
Five most recent fiscal years
2011		1222		983		2,012,900
2010		1051		855		2,424,600
2009		893		578		4,030,500
2008		733		519		4,758,300
2007		915		695		6,405,600
Most recent quarter and two most recent fiscal years
2011 Fourth quarter		1222		1069		1,866,800
Third quarter		1207		1038		2,335,900
Second quarter		1176		1087		1,904,400
First quarter		1105		983		1,929,400
2010 Fourth quarter		1034		926		2,126,500
Third quarter		1029		864		2,167,800
Second quarter		1051		888		2,967,400
First quarter		1037		855		2,466,700
Most recent six months
February 2012		1251		1183		2,549,300
January 2012		1255		1155		2,376,100
December 2011		1222		1127		1,631,300
November 2011		1155		1069		2,104,700
October 2011		1185		1130		1,843,100
September 2011		1164		1060		2,176,800

ITEM 10. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Articles of association

We summarize below the material provisions of our articles of association, as amended, which have been filed as an exhibit to our annual report on Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2011. The summary below is qualified entirely by reference to the Articles of Association. We have multiple business objectives and purposes and are authorized to do such things as the board may consider fit to further our interests or incidental or conducive to the attainment of our objectives and purposes.

Directors’ powers

Our business shall be managed by the board of directors and the board may exercise all such of our powers as are not required by law or by the Articles of Association or by any directions given by the Company by special resolution, to be exercised in a general meeting.

61

Interested directors

For the purposes of section 175 of the Companies Act 2006 the board may authorize any matter proposed to it which would, if not so authorized, involve a breach of duty by a Director under that section, including, without limitation, any matter which relates to a situation in which a Director has, or can have, an interest which conflicts, or possibly may conflict, with the interests of the Company. Any such authorization will be effective only if:

(a) any requirement as to quorum at the meeting at which the matter is considered is met without counting the Director in question or any other interested Director; and

(b) the matter was agreed to without their voting or would have been agreed to if their votes had not been counted.

The board may (whether at the time of the giving of the authorization or subsequently) make any such authorization subject to any limits or conditions it expressly imposes but such authorization is otherwise given to the fullest extent permitted. The board may vary or terminate any such authorization at any time.

Provided that he has disclosed to the board the nature and extent of his interest, a Director notwithstanding his office:

(a) may be a party to, or otherwise interested in, any transaction or arrangement with the Company or in which the Company is otherwise (directly or indirectly) interested;

(b) may act by himself or his firm in a professional capacity for the Company (otherwise than as auditor) and he or his firm shall be entitled to remuneration for professional services as if he were not a Director;

(c) may be a director or other officer of, or employed by, or a party to a transaction or arrangement with, or otherwise interested in, any body corporate in which the Company is otherwise (directly or indirectly) interested.

A Director shall not, by reason of his office, be accountable to the Company for any remuneration or other benefit which he derives from any office or employment or from any transaction or arrangement or from any interest in any body corporate:

(a) the acceptance, entry into or existence of which has been approved by the board (subject, in any such case, to any limits or conditions to which such approval was subject); or

(b) which he is permitted to hold or enter into by virtue of paragraph (a), (b) or (c) above;

nor shall the receipt of any such remuneration or other benefit constitute a breach of his duty under section 176 of the Act.

A Director shall be under no duty to the Company with respect to any information which he obtains or has obtained otherwise than as a director of the Company and in respect of which he owes a duty of confidentiality to another person. However, to the extent that his relationship with that other person gives rise to a conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest, which has been approved by the board: the director shall not be in breach of the general duties he owes to the Company by virtue of sections 171 to 177 of the Act because he fails:

(a) to disclose any such information to the board or to any Director or other officer or employee of the Company; and/or

(b) to use or apply any such information in performing his duties as a Director of the Company.

62

Where the existence of a Director’s relationship with another person has been approved by the board and his relationship with that person gives rise to a conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest, the Director shall not be in breach of the general duties he owes to the Company by virtue of sections 171 to 177 of the Act because he:

(a) absents himself from meetings of the board at which any matter relating to the conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest will or may be discussed or from the discussion of any such matter at a meeting or otherwise; and/or

(b) makes arrangements not to receive documents and information relating to any matter which gives rise to the conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest sent or supplied by the Company and/or for such documents and information to be received and read by a professional adviser, for so long as he reasonably believes such conflict of interest or possible conflict of interest subsists.

Except as stated below, a Director shall not vote in respect of any contract or arrangement or any other proposal whatsoever in which he has an interest which is, to his knowledge, a material interest, otherwise than by virtue of his interests in shares or debentures or other securities of or otherwise in or through the Company. A Director shall not be counted in the quorum at a meeting of the Board in relation to any resolution on which he is debarred from voting.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a director will be entitled to vote, and be counted in the quorum, on any resolution concerning any of the following matters:

• the giving of any guarantee, security or indemnity in respect of money lent or obligations incurred by him or by any other person at the request of or for the benefit of the Company or any of its subsidiaries;

• the giving of any guarantee, security or indemnity to a third party in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company or any of its subsidiaries for which he himself has assumed responsibility in whole or in part and whether alone or jointly with others under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security;

• any proposal relating to the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings where it is offering securities in which offer a Director is or may be entitled to participate as a holder of securities or in the underwriting or sub-underwriting of which a Director is to participate;

• any proposal relating to another company in which he and any persons connected with him do not to his knowledge hold an interest in shares (as that term is used in sections 820 to 825 of the Companies Act 2006) representing one per cent. or more of either any class of the equity share capital, or the voting rights, in such company;

• any proposal relating to an arrangement for the benefit of the employees of the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings which does not award him any privilege or benefit not generally awarded to the employees to whom such arrangement relates; and

• any proposal concerning insurance that we propose to maintain or purchase for the benefit of directors or for the benefit of persons, including directors.

Where proposals are under consideration concerning the appointment of two or more directors to offices or employment with us or any company in which we are interested, these proposals may be divided and considered separately and each of these directors, if not prohibited from voting under the provisions of the eighth paragraph before this one, will be entitled to vote and be counted in the quorum with respect to each resolution except that concerning his or her own appointment.

Borrowing powers

The board of directors may exercise all powers to borrow money and to mortgage or charge our undertaking, property and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and other securities, whether outright or as

63

collateral security for any of our or any third party’s debts, liabilities or obligations. The board of directors must restrict the borrowings in order to secure that the aggregate amount of undischarged monies borrowed by us (and any of our subsidiaries), but excluding any intra-group debts, shall not at any time (without the previous sanction of the Company in the form of an ordinary resolution) exceed a sum equal to twice the aggregate of the adjusted capital and reserves.

Other provisions relating to directors

Under the articles of association, directors are paid out of our funds for their services as we may from time to time determine by ordinary resolution and, in the case of non-executive directors, up to an aggregate of £750,000 or such other amounts as resolved by the shareholders at a general meeting. Directors currently are not required to hold any share qualification. From April 6, 2007 under the Companies Act 2006, the maximum age limit for directors of PLCs, which was 70, has been removed.

Annual general meetings

In every year the Company must hold an annual general meeting (‘AGM’) (within a period of not more than 15 months after the date of the preceding AGM) at a place and time determined by the board. The following matters are usually considered at an annual general meeting:

• approving final dividends;

• consideration of the accounts and balance sheet;

• ordinary reports of the board of directors and auditors and any other documents required to be annexed to the balance sheet;

• as holders of ordinary shares vote for the election of one-third of the members of the board of directors at every annual general meeting, the appointment or election of directors in the place of those retiring by rotation or otherwise;

• appointment or reappointment of, and determination of the remuneration of, the auditors; and

• the renewal, limitation, extension, variation or grant of any authority to the board in relation to the allotment of securities.

The board may call a general meeting whenever it thinks fit. If at any time there are not within the United Kingdom sufficient directors capable of acting to form a quorum, any director or any two members may convene a general meeting in the same manner as nearly as possible as that in which meetings may be convened by the board.

No business shall be dealt with at any general meeting unless a quorum is present when the meeting proceeds to business. Three members present in person and entitled to vote shall be a quorum for all purposes. A corporation being a member shall be deemed to be personally present if represented by its duly authorized representative.

If a quorum for a meeting convened at the request of shareholders is not present within fifteen minutes of the appointed time, the meeting will be dissolved. In any other case, the general meeting will be adjourned to the same day in the next week, at the same time and place, or to a time and place that the chairman fixes. If at that rescheduled meeting a quorum is not present within fifteen minutes from the time appointed for holding the meeting, the shareholders present in person or by proxy will be a quorum. The chairman or, in his absence, the deputy chairman or any other director nominated by the board, will preside as chairman at every general meeting. If no director is present at the general meeting or no director consents to act as chairman, the shareholders present shall elect one of their number to be chairman of the meeting.

64

Share Certificates

Every person whose name is entered as a member in the Company’s Register of Members shall be entitled to one certificate in respect of each class of shares held. (The law regarding this does not apply to stock exchange nominees). Subject to the terms of issue of the shares, certificates are issued following allotment or receipt of the form of transfer bearing the appropriate stamp duty by our registrar, Equiniti, Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex, BN99 6DA, United Kingdom, telephone number +44-(0)121-415-7062.

Share capital

Any share may be issued with such preferred, deferred or other special rights or other restrictions as we may determine by way of a shareholders’ vote in general meeting. Subject to the Companies Act 2006, any shares may be issued on terms that they are, or at our or the shareholders’ option are, liable to be redeemed on such terms and in such manner as we, before the issue of the shares, may determine by special resolution of the shareholders.

There are no provisions in the Articles of Association which discriminate against any existing or prospective shareholder as a result of such shareholder owning a substantial number of shares.

Subject to the terms of the shares which have been issued, the directors may from time to time make calls upon the shareholders in respect of any moneys unpaid on their shares, provided that (subject to the terms of the shares so issued) no call on any share shall be payable at less than fourteen clear days from the last call. The directors may, if they see fit, receive from any shareholder willing to advance the same, all and any part of the moneys uncalled and unpaid upon any shares held by him.

Changes in capital

We may from time to time, by ordinary resolution:

• consolidate and divide our share capital into shares of a larger amount than its existing shares; or

• sub-divide all of or any of our existing shares into shares of smaller amounts, subject to the Companies Act 2006; or

• cancel any shares which, at the date of passing of the resolution, have not been taken, or agreed to be taken, by any person and diminish the amount of our share capital by the amount of the shares so cancelled.

We may, from time to time, by ordinary resolution increase our share capital and, subject to the consents and incidents required by the Companies Act 2006, may by special resolution decrease our share capital, capital redemption reserve fund and any share premium account in any way.

Voting rights

Every holder of ordinary shares present in person at a meeting of shareholders has one vote on a vote taken by a show of hands. On a poll, every holder of ordinary shares who is present in person or by proxy has one vote for every ordinary share of which he or she is the holder. Voting at any meeting of shareholders is by a show of hands unless a poll is properly demanded before the declaration of the results of a show of hands. A poll may be demanded by:

• the chairman of the meeting;

• at least three shareholders present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote;

• any shareholder or shareholders present in person or by proxy representing not less than one-tenth of the total voting rights of all shareholders having the right to vote at the meeting; or

65

• any shareholder or shareholders present in person or by proxy holding shares conferring a right to vote at the meeting being shares on which the aggregate sum paid up is equal to not less than one-tenth of the total sum paid up on all shares conferring that right.

Dividends

Holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends out of our profits that are available by law for distribution, as we may declare by ordinary resolution, subject to the terms of issue thereof. However, no dividends may be declared in excess of an amount recommended by the board of directors. The board may pay interim dividends to the shareholders as it deems fit. We may invest or otherwise use all dividends left unclaimed for six months after having been declared for our benefit, until claimed. All dividends unclaimed for a period of twelve years after having been declared will be forfeited and revert to us.

The directors may, with the sanction of an ordinary resolution of the shareholders, offer any holders of ordinary shares the right to elect to receive ordinary shares credited as fully paid, in whole or in part, instead of cash in respect of such dividend.

The directors may deduct from any dividend payable to any shareholder all sums of money (if any) presently payable by that shareholder to us on account of calls or otherwise in relation to our shares.

Liquidation rights

In the event of our liquidation, after payment of all liabilities, our remaining assets would be used to repay the holders of ordinary shares the amount they paid for their ordinary shares. Any balance would be divided among the holders of ordinary shares in proportion to the nominal amount of the ordinary shares held by them.

Other provisions of the articles of association

Whenever our capital is divided into different classes of shares, the special rights attached to any class may, unless otherwise provided by the terms of the issue of the shares of that class, be varied or abrogated, either with the written consent of the holders of three-fourths of the issued shares of the class or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of these holders.

In the event that a shareholder or other person appearing to the board of directors to be interested in ordinary shares fails to comply with a notice requiring him or her to provide information with respect to their interest in voting shares pursuant to section 820 of the Companies Act 2006, we may serve that shareholder with a notice of default. After service of a default notice, that shareholder shall not be entitled to attend or vote at any general meeting or at a separate meeting of holders of a class of shares or on a poll until he or she has complied in full with our information request.

If the shares described in the default notice represent at least one-fourth of 1% in nominal value of the issued ordinary shares, then the default notice may additionally direct that in respect of those shares:

• we will not pay dividends (or issue shares in lieu of dividends); and

• we will not register transfers of shares unless the shareholder is not himself in default as regards supplying the information requested and the transfer, when presented for registration, is in such form as the board of directors may require to the effect that after due and careful inquiry, the shareholder is satisfied that no person in default is interested in any of the ordinary shares which are being transferred or the transfer is an approved transfer, as defined in our articles of association.

66

No provision of our articles of association expressly governs the ordinary share ownership threshold above which shareholder ownership must be disclosed. Under the Companies Act 2006, any person who acquires, either alone or, in specified circumstances, with others:

• a material interest in our voting share capital equal to or in excess of 3%; or

• a non-material interest equal to or in excess of 10%,

comes under an obligation to disclose prescribed particulars to us in respect of those ordinary shares. A disclosure obligation also arises where a person’s notifiable interests fall below the notifiable percentage, or where, above that level, the percentage of our voting share capital in which a person has a notifiable interest increases or decreases.

Limitations affecting holders of ordinary shares or ADSs

Under English law and our memorandum and articles of association, persons who are neither UK residents nor UK nationals may freely hold, vote and transfer ordinary shares in the same manner as UK residents or nationals.

With respect to the items discussed above, applicable UK law is not materially different from applicable US law.

Material contracts

Pearson has not entered into any contracts outside the ordinary course of business during the two year period immediately preceding the date of this annual report.

Executive employment contracts

We have entered into agreements with each of our executive directors pursuant to which such executive director is employed by us. These agreements describe the duties of such executive director and the compensation to be paid by us. See “Item 6. Directors, Senior Management and Employees — Compensation of Senior Management”. Each agreement may be terminated by us on 12 months’ notice or by the executive director on six months’ notice. In the event we terminate any executive director without giving the full 12 months’ advance notice, the executive director is entitled to receive liquidated damages equal to 12  months’ base salary and benefits together with a proportion of potential bonus.

Exchange controls

There are no UK government laws, decrees, regulations or other legislation which restrict or which may affect the import or export of capital, including the availability of cash and cash equivalents for use by us or the remittance of dividends, interest or other payments to nonresident holders of our securities, except as otherwise described under “— Tax Considerations” below.

Tax considerations

The following is a discussion of the material US federal income tax considerations and UK tax considerations arising from the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ordinary shares and ADSs by a US holder. A US holder is:

• an individual citizen or resident of the US, or

• a corporation created or organized in or under the laws of the US or any of its political subdivisions, or

67

• an estate or trust the income of which is subject to US federal income taxation regardless of its source.

This discussion deals only with ordinary shares and ADSs that are held as capital assets by a US holder, and does not address tax considerations applicable to US holders that may be subject to special tax rules, such as:

• dealers or traders in securities or currencies,

• financial institutions or other US holders that treat income in respect of the ordinary shares or ADSs as financial services income,

• insurance companies,

• tax-exempt entities,

• persons acquiring shares or ADSs in connection with employment,

• US holders that hold the ordinary shares or ADSs as a part of a straddle or conversion transaction or other arrangement involving more than one position,

• US holders that own, or are deemed for US tax purposes to own, 10% or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of our voting stock,

• US holders that have a principal place of business or “tax home” outside the United States, or

• US holders whose “functional currency” is not the US dollar.

For US federal income tax purposes, holders of ADSs will be treated as the owners of the ordinary shares represented by those ADSs.

In addition, the following discussion assumes that The Bank of New York will perform its obligations as depositary in accordance with the terms of the depositary agreement and any related agreements.

Because US and UK tax consequences may differ from one holder to the next, the discussion set out below does not purport to describe all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to you and your particular situation. Accordingly, you are advised to consult your own tax advisor as to the US federal, state and local, UK and other, including foreign, tax consequences of investing in the ordinary shares or ADSs. The statements of US and UK tax law set out below are based on the laws and interpretations in force as of the date of this Annual Report, and are subject to any changes occurring after that date, possibly with retroactive effect.

UK income taxation of distributions

The UK does not impose dividend withholding tax on dividends paid by the Company.

A US holder that is not resident in the UK for UK tax purposes and does not carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch or agency (or in the case of a company a permanent establishment) to which the ordinary shares or ADSs are attributable will not generally be liable to pay UK tax on dividends paid by the Company.

US income taxation of distributions

Distributions that we make with respect to the ordinary shares or ADSs, other than distributions in liquidation and distributions in redemption of stock that are treated as exchanges, will be taxed to US holders as ordinary dividend income to the extent that the distributions do not exceed our current and accumulated earnings and profits. The amount of any distribution will equal the amount of the cash distribution. Distributions, if any, in excess of our current and accumulated earnings and profits will constitute a non-taxable return of capital to a US

68

holder and will be applied against and reduce the US holder’s tax basis in its ordinary shares or ADSs. To the extent that these distributions exceed the tax basis of the US holder in its ordinary shares or ADSs, the excess generally will be treated as capital gain.

Dividends that we pay will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction generally allowed to US corporations under Section 243 of the Code.

In the case of distributions in pounds, the amount of the distributions generally will equal the US dollar value of the pounds distributed, determined by reference to the spot currency exchange rate on the date of receipt of the distribution by the US holder in the case of shares or by The Bank of New York in the case of ADSs, regardless of whether the US holder reports income on a cash basis or an accrual basis. The US holder will realize separate foreign currency gain or loss only to the extent that this gain or loss arises on the actual disposition of pounds received. For US holders claiming tax credits on a cash basis, taxes withheld from the distribution are translated into US dollars at the spot rate on the date of the distribution; for US holders claiming tax credits on an accrual basis, taxes withheld from the distribution are translated into US dollars at the average rate for the taxable year.

A distribution by the Company to noncorporate shareholders before 2013 will be taxed as net capital gain at a maximum rate of 15%, provided certain holding periods are met, to the extent such distribution is treated as a dividend under US federal income tax principles.

UK taxation of capital gains

A US holder that is not resident, and, in the case of an individual, not ordinarily resident, in the UK for UK tax purposes and who does not carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch or agency (or in the case of a company a permanent establishment) to which the ordinary shares or ADSs are attributable will not generally be liable for UK taxation on capital gains or eligible for relief for allowable losses, realized on the sale or other disposal of the ordinary shares or ADSs.

A US holder who is an individual and who has ceased to be resident or ordinarily resident for tax purposes in the UK on or after 17 March 1998 or who falls to be regarded as resident outside the UK for the purposes of any double tax treaty (“Treaty Non-resident”) on or after 16 March 2005 and continues to not be resident or ordinarily resident in the UK, or continues to be Treaty Non-resident, for a period of less than five complete years of assessment and who disposes of his ordinary shares or ADSs during that period may also be liable on his return to the UK to UK tax on capital gains, subject to any available exemption or relief, even though he is not resident or ordinarily resident in the UK, or is Treaty Non-resident, at the time of the disposal.

US income taxation of capital gains

Upon a sale or exchange of ordinary shares or ADSs to a person other than Pearson, a US holder will recognize gain or loss in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realized on the sale or exchange and the US holder’s adjusted tax basis in the ordinary shares or ADSs. Any gain or loss recognized will be capital gain or loss and will be long-term capital gain or loss if the US holder has held the ordinary shares or ADSs for more than one year. Long-term capital gain of a noncorporate US holder is generally taxed at a maximum rate of 15%. This long-term capital gain rate is scheduled to expire in 2013.

Gain or loss realized by a US holder on the sale or exchange of ordinary shares or ADSs generally will be treated as US-source gain or loss for US foreign tax credit purposes.

Estate and gift tax

The current Estate and Gift Tax Convention, or the Convention, between the US and the UK generally relieves from UK Inheritance Tax (the equivalent of US Estate and Gift Tax) the transfer of ordinary shares or of

69

ADSs where the transferor is domiciled in the US for the purposes of the Convention. This relief will not apply if the ordinary shares or ADSs are part of the business property of an individual’s permanent establishment in the UK or pertain to the fixed base in the UK of a person providing independent personal services. If no relief is given under the Convention, inheritance tax may be charged on the amount by which the value of the transferor’s estate is reduced as a result of any transfer made by way of gift or other gratuitous or undervalue transfer by an individual, in general within seven years of death, or on the death of an individual, and in certain other circumstances. In the unusual case where ordinary shares or ADSs are subject to both UK Inheritance Tax and US Estate or Gift Tax, the Convention generally provides for tax paid in the UK to be credited against tax payable in the US or for tax paid in the US to be credited against tax payable in the UK based on priority rules set forth in the Convention.

Stamp duty

No stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax (SDRT) will generally be payable in the UK on the purchase or transfer of an ADS, provided that the ADS, and any separate instrument or written agreement of transfer, remain at all times outside the UK and that the instrument or written agreement of transfer is not executed in the UK. Subject to the following paragraph, stamp duty or SDRT is, however, generally payable at the rate of 1.5% of the amount or value of the consideration or, in some circumstances, the value of the ordinary shares (rounded up to the next multiple of £5 in the case of stamp duty), where ordinary shares are issued or transferred to a person whose business is or includes issuing depositary receipts, or to a nominee or agent for such a person, or issued or transferred to a person whose business is or includes the provision of clearance services or a nominee or agent for such a person.

Following a decision of the European Court of Justice in 2009, HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) has announced that it will not seek to apply the 1.5% SDRT charge when new shares are issued to an EU clearance service or EU depositary receipt system. HMRC’s view is that the 1.5% SDRT charge will continue to apply to transfers of shares into a clearance service or depositary receipt system, and also in respect of issues of shares into non-EU clearance services and non-EU depositary receipt systems, including in connection with ADSs. HMRC’s view is currently being challenged in further litigation, but it is expected that HMRC will continue to impose such charges until further case law or legislation resolves the issue. Accordingly, specific professional advice should be sought before paying the 1.5% SDRT or stamp duty charge in any circumstances.

A transfer for value of the underlying ordinary shares will generally be subject to either stamp duty or SDRT, normally at the rate of 0.5% of the amount or value of the consideration (rounded up to the next multiple of £5 in the case of stamp duty). A transfer of ordinary shares from a nominee to its beneficial owner, including the transfer of underlying ordinary shares from the Depositary to an ADS holder, under which no beneficial interest passes will not be subject to stamp duty or SDRT.

Close company status

We believe that the close company provisions of the UK Corporation Tax Act 2010 do not apply to us.

Documents on display

Copies of our Memorandum and Articles of Association and filed as exhibits to this Annual Report and certain other documents referred to in this Annual Report are available for inspection at our registered office at 80 Strand, London WC2R 0RL (c/o the Company Secretary), or, in the US, at the registered office of Pearson Inc. at 1330 Avenue of the Americas, 7th Floor, New York, New York, during usual business hours upon reasonable prior request.

70

ITEM 11. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Introduction

Our principal market risks are changes in interest rates and currency exchange rates. Following an evaluation of these positions, we selectively enter into derivative financial instruments to manage our risk exposure. For this purpose, we primarily use interest rate swaps, interest rate caps and collars, forward rate agreements, currency swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts. Managing market risks is the responsibility of the chief financial officer, who acts pursuant to policies approved by the board of directors. The Audit Committee receives regular reports on our treasury activities.

We have a policy of not undertaking any speculative transactions, and we do not hold our derivative and other financial instruments for trading purposes.

We have formulated policies for hedging exposures to interest rate and foreign exchange risk, and have used derivatives to ensure compliance with these policies. Although a proportion of our derivative contracts were transacted without regard to existing IFRS requirements on hedge accounting, during 2011 and 2010 we qualified for hedge accounting under IFRS on a number of our key derivative contracts.

The following discussion addresses market risk only and does not present other risks that we face in the normal course of business, including country risk, credit risk and legal risk.

Interest rates

The Group’s financial exposure to interest rates arises primarily from its borrowings. The Group manages its exposure by borrowing at fixed and variable rates of interest, and by entering into derivative transactions. Objectives approved by the board concerning the proportion of debt outstanding at fixed rates govern the use of these financial instruments.

The Group’s objectives are applied to core net debt, which is measured at the year-end and comprises borrowings net of cash and other liquid funds. Our objective is to maintain a proportion of forecast core net debt in fixed or capped form for the next four years, subject to a maximum of 65% and a minimum that starts at 40% and falls by 10% each year.

The principal method of hedging interest rate risk is to enter into an agreement with a bank counterparty to pay a fixed rate and receive a variable rate, known as a swap. Under interest rate swaps, the Group agrees with other parties to exchange, at specified intervals, the difference between fixed-rate and variable-rate amounts calculated by reference to an agreed notional principal amount. The majority of the Group’s swap contracts are US dollar denominated, and some of them have deferred start dates, in order to maintain the desired risk profile as other contracts mature. The variable rates received are normally based on three-month or six-month LIBOR, and the dates on which these rates are set do not necessarily exactly match those of the hedged borrowings. Management believes that our portfolio of these types of swaps is an efficient hedge of our portfolio of variable rate borrowings.

In addition, from time to time, the Group issues bonds or other capital market instruments to refinance existing debt. To avoid the fixed rate on a single transaction unduly influencing our overall net interest expense, our typical practice has been to enter into a related derivative contract effectively converting the interest rate profile of the bond transaction to a variable interest rate. In some cases, the bond issue is denominated in a different currency to the Group’s desired borrowing risk profile and the Group enters into a related cross currency interest rate swap in order to maintain this risk profile, which is predominantly borrowings denominated in US dollars.

The Group’s accounting objective in its use of interest rate derivatives is to minimize the impact on the income statement of changes in the mark-to-market value of its derivative portfolio as a whole. It uses duration

71

calculations to estimate the sensitivity of the derivatives to movements in market rates. The Group also identifies which derivatives are eligible for fair value hedge accounting (which reduces significantly the income statement impact of changes in the market value of a derivative). The Group then divides the total portfolio between hedge-accounted and pooled segments, so that the expected movement on the pooled segment is minimized.

Currency exchange rates

Although the Group is based in the UK, it has significant investments in overseas operations. The most significant currency in which the Group trades is the US dollar.

The Group’s policy is to align approximately the currency composition of its core net borrowings with its forecast operating profit before depreciation and amortization. This policy aims to soften the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on consolidated interest cover and earnings. This policy applies only to currencies that account for more than 15% of group operating profit, which currently are the US dollar and sterling. However, the Group still borrows small amounts in other currencies, typically for seasonal working capital needs. In addition, the Group’s policy does not require existing currency debt to be terminated to match declines in that currency’s share of Group operating profit. Also, the chief financial officer may request the inclusion of currencies that account for less than 15% of Group operating profit before depreciation and amortization in the above hedging process. Only one hedging transaction, denominated in South African rand, has been undertaken under that authority.

At December 31, 2011 the Group’s net borrowings/(cash) in our main currencies (taking into account the effect of cross currency rate swaps) were: US dollar £1,266m, sterling £(185)m, and South African rand £(1)m.

The Group uses both currency denominated debt and derivative instruments to implement the above policy. Its intention is that gains/losses on the derivatives and debt offset the losses/gains on the foreign currency assets and income. Each quarter the value of hedging instruments is monitored against the assets in the relevant currency and, where practical, a decision is made whether to treat the debt or derivative as a net investment hedge (permitting foreign exchange movements on it to be taken to reserves) for the purposes of reporting under IFRS.

Investments in overseas operations are consolidated for accounting purposes by translating values in one currency to another currency, in particular from US dollars to sterling. Fluctuations in currency exchange rates affect the currency values recorded in our accounts, although they do not give rise to any realized gain or loss, nor to any currency cash flows.

The Group is also exposed to currency exchange rates in its cash transactions and its investments in overseas operations. Cash transactions — typically for purchases, sales, interest or dividends — require cash conversions between currencies. Fluctuations in currency exchange rates affect the cash amounts that the Group pays or receives.

Forward foreign exchange contracts

The Group sometimes uses forward foreign exchange contracts where a specific major project or forecasted cash flow, including acquisitions and disposals, arises from a business decision that has used a specific foreign exchange rate. The Group’s policy is to effect routine transactional conversions between currencies, for example to collect receivables or settle payables, at the relevant spot exchange rate.

The Group seeks to offset purchases and sales in the same currency, even if they do not occur simultaneously. In addition, its debt and cash portfolios management gives rise to temporary currency shortfalls and surpluses. Both of these activities require using short-dated foreign exchange swaps between currencies.

72

Although the Group prepares its consolidated financial statements in sterling, significant sums have been invested in overseas assets, particularly in the US. Therefore, fluctuations in currency exchange rates, particularly between the US dollar and sterling, and to a lesser extent between the euro and sterling, are likely to affect shareholders’ funds and other accounting values.

Derivatives

Under IFRS, the Group is required to record all derivative instruments on the balance sheet at fair value. Derivatives not classified as hedges are adjusted to fair value through earnings. Changes in the fair value of derivatives that the Group has designated and that qualify as effective hedges are either recorded in reserves or are offset in earnings by the corresponding movement in the fair value of the underlying hedged item. Any ineffective portion of derivatives that are classified as hedges is immediately recognized in earnings.

In 2011 and 2010 the Group met the prescribed designation requirements and hedge effectiveness tests under IFRS for some of its derivative contracts. As a result, the movements in the fair value of the effective portion of fair value hedges and net investment hedges have been offset in earnings and reserves respectively by the corresponding movement in the fair value of the underlying hedged item.

In line with the Group’s treasury policy, none of these instruments were considered trading instruments and each instrument was transacted solely to match an underlying financial exposure.

Quantitative information about market risk

The sensitivity of the Group’s derivative portfolio to changes in interest rates is found in note 19 of “Item 18. Financial Statements”.

ITEM 12. DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

ITEM 12D. AMERICAN DEPOSITARY SHARES

Fees paid by ADR holders

Our ordinary shares trade in the United States under a sponsored ADR facility with The Bank of New York Mellon as depositary.

The depositary collects its fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal, or from intermediaries acting for them. The depositary collects fees for making distributions to investors by deducting those fees from the amounts distributed or by selling a portion of distributable property to pay the fees. The depositary may collect its annual fee for depositary services by deductions from cash distributions or by directly billing investors or by charging the book-entry system accounts of participants acting for them. The depositary may generally refuse to provide fee-attracting services until its fees for those services are paid.

73

The following table summarizes various fees currently charged by The Bank of New York Mellon:

Person depositing or withdrawing shares must pay to the depositary:	For:
$5.00 (or less) per 100 ADSs (or portion of 100 ADSs)	•  Issuance of ADSs, including issuances resulting from a distribution of shares or rights or other property •  Cancellation of ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal, including if the deposit agreement terminates
$.02 (or less) per ADS	•  Any cash distribution to ADS registered holders
A fee equivalent to the fee that would be payable if securities distributed had been shares and the shares had been deposited for issuance of ADSs	•  Distribution of securities by the depositary to ADS registered holders of deposited securities
$.02 (or less) per ADS per calendar year	•  Depositary services
Registration of transfer fees	•  Transfer and registration of shares on the share register to or from the name of the depositary or its agent when shares are deposited or withdrawn
Expenses of the depositary	•  Cable, telex and facsimile transmissions (when expressly provided in the deposit agreement) •  Converting foreign currency to U.S. dollars
Taxes and other governmental charges the depositary or the custodian have to pay on any ADS or share underlying an ADS, for example, stock transfer taxes, stamp duty or withholding taxes	•  As necessary
Any charges incurred by the depositary or its agents for servicing the deposited securities	•  As necessary

Fees incurred in past annual period and fees to be paid in the future

From January 1, 2011 to February 29, 2012 the Company received payments from the depositary of $350,000 and $53,853 for continuing annual stock exchange listing fees, standard out-of-pocket maintenance costs for the ADRs (consisting of the expenses of postage and envelopes for mailing the annual and interim financial reports, printing and distributing dividend cheques, electronic filing of U.S. Federal tax information, mailing required tax forms, stationery, postage, facsimile and telephone calls), any applicable performance indicators relating to the ADR facility, underwriting fees and legal fees.

The depositary has agreed to reimburse the Company for expenses they incur that are related to establishment and maintenance expenses of the ADS programme. The depositary has agreed to reimburse the Company for its continuing annual stock exchange listing fees. The depositary has also agreed to pay the standard out-of-pocket maintenance costs for the ADRs, which consists of the expenses of postage and envelopes for mailing annual and interim financial reports, printing and distributing dividend cheques, electronic filing of U.S. Federal tax information, mailing required tax forms, stationery, postage, facsimile and telephone calls. It has also agreed to reimburse the Company annually for certain investor relationship programmes or special investor relations promotional activities. In certain instances, the depositary has agreed to provide additional payments to

74

the Company based on any applicable performance indicators relating to the ADR facility. There are limits on the amount of expenses for which the depositary will reimburse the Company, but the amount of reimbursement available to the Company is not necessarily tied to the amount of fees the depositary collects from investors.

The depositary collects its fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal, or from intermediaries acting for them. The depositary collects fees for making distributions to investors by deducting those fees from the amounts distributed or by selling a portion of distributable property to pay the fees. The depositary may collect its annual fee for depositary services by deduction from cash distributions or by directly billing investors or by charging the book-entry system accounts of participants acting for them. The depositary may generally refuse to provide fee-attracting services until its fees for those services are paid.

PART II

ITEM 13. DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

None.

ITEM 14. MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

None.

ITEM 15. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

Disclosure controls and procedures

An evaluation of the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures as of December 31, 2011 was carried out by us under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including the chief executive officer and chief financial officer. Based on that evaluation the chief executive officer and chief financial officer concluded that Pearson’s disclosure controls and procedures have been designed to provide, and are effective in providing, reasonable assurance that the information required to be disclosed by us in reports filed under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission’s rules and forms and that such information is accumulated and communicated to management, including the chief executive officer and chief financial officer, as appropriate to allow such timely decision regarding required disclosures. A controls system, no matter how well designed and operated cannot provide absolute assurance to achieve its objectives.

Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting

The Company’s management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for the Company. Internal control over financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

Management conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting based on the framework in Internal Control — Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

Management has assessed the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, as at December 31, 2011, and has concluded that such internal control over financial reporting was effective.

75

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, which has audited the consolidated financial statements of the Company for the year ended December 31, 2011, has also audited the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting under Auditing Standard No. 5 of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Their audit report may be found on page F-2.

Change in internal control over financial reporting

During the period covered by this Annual Report on Form 20-F, Pearson has made no changes to its internal controls over financial reporting that have materially affected or are reasonably likely to materially affect Pearson’s internal control over financial reporting.

ITEM 16A. AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

The members of the Board of Directors of Pearson plc have determined that Ken Hydon is an audit committee financial expert within the meaning of the applicable rules and regulations of the US Securities and Exchange Commission.

ITEM 16B. CODE OF ETHICS

Pearson has adopted a code of ethics (the Pearson code of business conduct) which applies to all employees including the chief executive officer and chief financial officer and other senior financial management. This code of ethics is available on our website (www.pearson.com/responsibility/values/code-of-conduct/). The information on our website is not incorporated by reference into this report.

ITEM 16C. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

In line with best practice, our relationship with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) is governed by our external auditor policy, which is reviewed and approved annually by the audit committee. The policy establishes procedures to ensure the auditors’ independence is not compromised as well as defining those non-audit services that PwC may or may not provide to Pearson. These allowable services are in accordance with relevant UK and US legislation.

The audit committee approves all audit and non-audit services provided by PwC. Certain categories of allowable non-audit services have been pre-approved by the audit committee subject to the authorities below:

• Pre-approved non-audit services can be authorized by the chief financial officer up to £100,000 per project, subject to a cumulative limit of £500,000 per annum;

• Tax compliance and related activities up to the greater of £1,000,000 per annum or 50% of the external audit fee; and

• For forward-looking tax planning services we use the most appropriate advisor, usually after a tender process. Where we decide to use our independent auditor, authority, up to £100,000 per project subject to a cumulative limit of £500,000 per annum, has been delegated by the audit committee to management.

Services provided by PwC above these limits and all other allowable non-audit services, such as due diligence, irrespective of value, must be approved by the audit committee. Where appropriate, services will be tendered prior to awarding this work to the auditor.

The following table sets forth remuneration paid to PwC for 2010 and 2011:

Auditors’ Remuneration	2011		2010
	£m		£m
Audit fees		6		6
Tax fees		2		2
All other fees		1		2

76

Audit fees include £35,000 (2010: £35,000) of audit fees relating to the audit of the parent company.

Fees for the audit of the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control over financial reporting are allocated to audit fees paid.

Tax services include services related to tax planning and various other tax advisory services.

ITEM 16D. EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

Not applicable.

ITEM 16E. PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASES

Period	Total number of shares purchased		Average price paid per share		Total number of units purchased as part of publicly announced plans or programs		Maximum number of shares that may yet be purchased under the plans or programs
May 1, 2010 - May 31, 2010		3,000,000	£	9.94		N/A		N/A
June 1, 2010 - June 30, 2010		2,000,000	£	9.17		N/A		N/A
October 1, 2010 - October 31, 2010		1,000,000	£	9.83		N/A		N/A
November 1, 2010 - November 31, 2010		2,000,000	£	9.46		N/A		N/A
June 1, 2011 - June 30, 2011		1,000,000	£	11.55		N/A		N/A
August 1, 2011 - August 31, 2011		4,369,406	£	11.08		N/A		N/A

Purchases of shares were made to satisfy obligations under Pearson employee share award programs. All purchases were made in open-market transactions. None of the foregoing share purchases was made as part of a publicly announced plan or program.

ITEM 16F. CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING AUDITOR

Not applicable.

ITEM 16G. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Pearson is listed on the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”). As a listed non-US issuer, we are required to comply with some of the NYSE’s corporate governance rules, and otherwise must disclose on our website any significant ways in which our corporate governance practices differ from those followed by US companies under the NYSE listing standards. At this time, the Company believes that it is in compliance in all material respects with all the NYSE rules except that the Nomination Committee is not composed entirely of independent directors, and that it is the full board, not the Nomination Committee, that develops and recommends corporate governance principles.

ITEM 16H. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURE

Not applicable.

77

PART III

ITEM 17. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Not applicable.

ITEM 18. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The financial statements filed as part of this Annual Report are included on pages F-1 through F-68 hereof.

78

ITEM 19. EXHIBITS

1.1	Articles of Association of Pearson plc.
2.1	Indenture dated June 23, 2003 between Pearson plc and The Bank of New York, as trustee *
2.2	Indenture dated May 25, 2004 among Pearson Dollar Finance plc, as Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and the Bank of New York, as trustee, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent. #
2.3	Indenture dated June 21, 2001 between Pearson plc and The Bank of New York, as trustee.†
2.4	Indenture dated March 26, 2009 among Pearson Funding One plc, as the Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and The Law Debenture Trust Corporation P.L.C., as trustee. ¥
2.5	Indenture dated May 6, 2008 among Pearson Dollar Finance Two plc, as the Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and The Bank of New York, as trustee, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent. ¥
2.6	Indenture dated October 27, 1999 between Pearson plc, as the Issuer and The Law Debenture Trust Corporation P.L.C., as trustee. ¥
2.7	Indenture dated May 17, 2010 between Pearson Funding Two plc, as the Issuer, Pearson plc, Guarantor, and The Bank of New York Mellon, as trustee, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent. l
8.1	List of Significant Subsidiaries.
12.1	Certification of Chief Executive Officer.
12.2	Certification of Chief Financial Officer.
13.1	Certification of Chief Executive Officer.
13.2	Certification of Chief Financial Officer.
15	Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP.

* Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2003 and filed May 7, 2004.

# Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2004 and filed June 27, 2005.

† Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2001 and filed June 10, 2002.

¥ Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2009 and filed March 31, 2010.

l Incorporated by reference from the Form 20-F of Pearson plc for the year ended December 31, 2010 and filed March 25, 2011.

79

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS: CONTENTS

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm	F-2
Consolidated Income Statement for the year ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009	F-3
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income for the year  ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009	F-4
Consolidated Balance Sheet as at December 31, 2011 and 2010	F-5
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009	F-6
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement for the year ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009	F-7
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements	F-8

F-1

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Pearson plc

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, equity and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Pearson plc and its subsidiaries (the “Group”) at December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2010 and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2011, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. Also in our opinion, the Group maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2011, based on criteria established in “Internal Control — Integrated Framework” issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

The Group’s management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in “Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting” appearing under Item 15 of this Form 20-F. Our responsibility is to express opinions on these financial statements and on the Group’s internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London

United Kingdom

March 27, 2012

F-2

Consolidated income statement

Year ended 31 December 2011

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010			2009
Sales		2		5,862			5,663			5,140
Cost of goods sold		4		(2,624	)		(2,588	)		(2,382	)
Gross profit				3,238			3,075			2,758
Operating expenses		4		(2,457	)		(2,373	)		(2,169	)
Profit on sale of associate		12		412			—			—
Share of results of joint ventures and associates		12		33			41			30
Operating profit		2		1,226			743			619
Finance costs		6		(97	)		(109	)		(122	)
Finance income		6		26			36			26
Profit before tax				1,155			670			523
Income tax		7		(199	)		(146	)		(146	)
Profit for the year from continuing operations				956			524			377
Profit for the year from discontinued operations		3		—			776			85
Profit for the year				956			1,300			462
Attributable to:
Equity holders of the company				957			1,297			425
Non-controlling interest				(1	)		3			37
Earnings per share for profit from continuing and discontinued operations attributable to equity holders of the company during the year (expressed in pence per share)
– basic		8		119.6p			161.9p			53.2p
– diluted		8		119.3p			161.5p			53.1p
Earnings per share for profit from continuing operations attributable to equity holders of the company during the year (expressed in pence per share)
– basic		8		119.6p			66.0p			47.0p
– diluted		8		119.3p			65.9p			47.0p

F-3

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

Year ended 31 December 2011

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010			2009
Profit for the year				956			1,300			462
Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations				(44	)		173			(388	)
Currency translation adjustment disposed – subsidiaries				—			13			—
Actuarial (losses)/gains on retirement benefit obligations – Group		25		(56	)		70			(299	)
Actuarial (losses)/gains on retirement benefit obligations – associate		12		(8	)		1			(3	)
Net increase in fair values of proportionate holding arising on stepped acquisition				—			—			18
Tax on items recognised in other comprehensive income		7		3			(41	)		91
Other comprehensive (expense)/income for the year				(105	)		216			(581	)
Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the year				851			1,516			(119	)
Attributable to:
Equity holders of the company				858			1,502			(127	)
Non-controlling interest				(7	)		14			8

F-4

Consolidated balance sheet

As at 31 December 2011

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment		10		383			366
Intangible assets		11		6,342			5,467
Investments in joint ventures and associates		12		32			71
Deferred income tax assets		13		287			276
Financial assets – Derivative financial instruments		16		177			134
Retirement benefit assets		25		25			—
Other financial assets		15		26			58
Trade and other receivables		22		151			129
				7,423			6,501
Current assets
Intangible assets – Pre-publication		20		650			647
Inventories		21		407			429
Trade and other receivables		22		1,386			1,337
Financial assets – Derivative financial instruments		16		—			6
Financial assets – Marketable securities		14		9			12
Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts)		17		1,369			1,736
				3,821			4,167
Total assets				11,244			10,668
Liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Financial liabilities – Borrowings		18		(1,964	)		(1,908	)
Financial liabilities – Derivative financial instruments		16		(2	)		(6	)
Deferred income tax liabilities		13		(620	)		(471	)
Retirement benefit obligations		25		(166	)		(148	)
Provisions for other liabilities and charges		23		(115	)		(42	)
Other liabilities		24		(325	)		(246	)
				(3,192	)		(2,821	)
Current liabilities
Trade and other liabilities		24		(1,741	)		(1,605	)
Financial liabilities – Borrowings		18		(87	)		(404	)
Financial liabilities – Derivative financial instruments		16		(1	)		—
Current income tax liabilities				(213	)		(215	)
Provisions for other liabilities and charges		23		(48	)		(18	)
				(2,090	)		(2,242	)
Total liabilities				(5,282	)		(5,063	)
Net assets				5,962			5,605
Equity
Share capital		27		204			203
Share premium		27		2,544			2,524
Treasury shares		28		(149	)		(137	)
Translation reserve				364			402
Retained earnings				2,980			2,546
Total equity attributable to equity holders of the company				5,943			5,538
Non-controlling interest				19			67
Total equity				5,962			5,605

These financial statements have been approved for issue by the board of directors on 7 March 2012 and signed on its behalf by

Robin Freestone Chief financial officer

F-5

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Year ended 31 December 2011

	Equity attributable to equity holders of the company
All figures in £ millions	Share capital		Share premium		Treasury shares			Translation reserve			Retained earnings			Total			Non- controlling interest			Total equity
At 1 January 2011		203		2,524		(137	)		402			2,546			5,538			67			5,605
Profit for the year		—		—		—			—			957			957			(1	)		956
Other comprehensive expense		—		—		—			(38	)		(61	)		(99	)		(6	)		(105	)
Equity-settled transactions		—		—		—			—			40			40			—			40
Tax on equity-settled transactions		—		—		—			—			3			3			—			3
Issue of ordinary shares under share option schemes		1		20		—			—			—			21			—			21
Purchase of treasury shares		—		—		(60	)		—			—			(60	)		—			(60	)
Release of treasury shares		—		—		48			—			(48	)		—			—			—
Put options over non-controlling interest		—		—		—			—			(63	)		(63	)		—			(63	)
Changes in non-controlling interest		—		—		—			—			(76	)		(76	)		(40	)		(116	)
Dividends		—		—		—			—			(318	)		(318	)		(1	)		(319	)
At 31 December 2011		204		2,544		(149	)		364			2,980			5,943			19			5,962

	Equity attributable to equity holders of the company
All figures in £ millions	Share capital		Share premium		Treasury shares			Translation reserve		Retained earnings			Total			Non- controlling interest			Total equity
At 1 January 2010		203		2,512		(226	)		227		1,629			4,345			291			4,636
Profit for the year		—		—		—			—		1,297			1,297			3			1,300
Other comprehensive income		—		—		—			175		30			205			11			216
Equity-settled transactions		—		—		—			—		50			50			—			50
Tax on equity-settled transactions		—		—		—			—		4			4			—			4
Issue of ordinary shares under share option schemes		—		12		—			—		—			12			—			12
Purchase of treasury shares		—		—		(77	)		—		—			(77	)		—			(77	)
Release/cancellation of treasury shares		—		—		166			—		(166	)		—			—			—
Changes in non-controlling interest		—		—		—			—		(6	)		(6	)		(231	)		(237	)
Dividends		—		—		—			—		(292	)		(292	)		(7	)		(299	)
At 31 December 2010		203		2,524		(137	)		402		2,546			5,538			67			5,605

	Equity attributable to equity holders of the company
	Share capital		Share premium		Treasury shares			Translation reserve			Retained earnings			Total			Non- controlling interest			Total equity
At 1 January 2009		202		2,505		(222	)		586			1,679			4,750			274			5,024
Profit for the year		—		—		—			—			425			425			37			462
Other comprehensive expense		—		—		—			(359	)		(193	)		(552	)		(29	)		(581	)
Equity-settled transactions		—		—		—			—			37			37			—			37
Tax on equity-settled transactions		—		—		—			—			6			6			—			6
Issue of ordinary shares under share option schemes		1		7		—			—			—			8			—			8
Purchase of treasury shares		—		—		(33	)		—			—			(33	)		—			(33	)
Release of treasury shares		—		—		29			—			(29	)		—			—			—
Put option over non-controlling interest		—		—		—			—			(23	)		(23	)		—			(23	)
Changes in non-controlling shareholding		—		—		—			—			—			—			24			24
Dividends		—		—		—			—			(273	)		(273	)		(15	)		(288	)
At 31 December 2009		203		2,512		(226	)		227			1,629			4,345			291			4,636

The translation reserve includes exchange differences arising from the translation of the net investment in foreign operations and of borrowings and other currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments.

F-6

Consolidated cash flow statement

Year ended 31 December 2011

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010			2009
Cash flows from operating activities
Net cash generated from operations		33		1,093			1,169			1,012
Interest paid				(70	)		(78	)		(90	)
Tax paid				(151	)		(85	)		(103	)
Net cash generated from operating activities				872			1,006			819
Cash flows from investing activities
Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired		30		(779	)		(535	)		(208	)
Acquisition of joint ventures and associates				(9	)		(22	)		(14	)
Purchase of investments				(12	)		(7	)		(10	)
Purchase of property, plant and equipment				(67	)		(76	)		(62	)
Purchase of intangible assets				(77	)		(56	)		(58	)
Disposal of subsidiaries, net of cash disposed		31		(6	)		984			—
Proceeds from sale of associates		12		428			—			—
Proceeds from sale of investments				75			—			—
Proceeds from sale of property, plant & equipment		33		9			—			1
Proceeds from sale of intangible assets				3			—			—
Tax paid on disposal of subsidiaries				—			(250	)		—
Interest received				10			10			3
Dividends received from joint ventures and associates				30			23			22
Net cash (used in)/received from investing activities				(395	)		71			(326	)
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares		27		21			12			8
Purchase of treasury shares		28		(60	)		(77	)		(33	)
Proceeds from borrowings				—			241			296
Liquid resources acquired				—			—			(13	)
Liquid resources sold				2			53			—
Repayment of borrowings				(318	)		(13	)		(343	)
Finance lease principal payments				(8	)		(3	)		(2	)
Dividends paid to company’s shareholders		9		(318	)		(292	)		(273	)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interest				(1	)		(6	)		(20	)
Transactions with non-controlling interest		32		(108	)		(7	)		14
Net cash used in financing activities				(790	)		(92	)		(366	)
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents				(60	)		(1	)		(36	)
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents				(373	)		984			91
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year				1,664			680			589
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year		17		1,291			1,664			680

The consolidated cash flow statement includes discontinued operations (see note 3).

F-7

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

General information

Pearson plc (the company) and its subsidiaries (together the Group) are international media businesses covering education, business information and consumer publishing.

The company is a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in England. The address of its registered office is 80 Strand, London WC2R 0RL.

The company has its primary listing on the London Stock Exchange and is also listed on the New York Stock Exchange.

These consolidated financial statements were approved for issue by the board of directors on 7 March 2012.

1. Accounting policies

The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these consolidated financial statements are set out below.

a. Basis of preparation

These consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and IFRS Interpretations Committee interpretations as adopted by the European Union (EU) and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting under IFRS. These consolidated financial statements are also prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). In respect of the accounting standards applicable to the Group there is no difference between EU-adopted and IASB-adopted IFRS.

These consolidated financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention as modified by the revaluation of financial assets and liabilities (including derivative financial instruments) to fair value.

1. Interpretations and amendments to published standards effective in 2011

The following amendments and interpretations were adopted in 2011 and have not had an impact on the Group financial statements:

• Amendments to IAS 24 ‘Related Parties’.

• Amendments to IAS 32 ‘Financial Instruments: Presentation’ – Classification of Rights.

• IFRIC 19 ‘Extinguishing Financial Liabilities with Equity Instruments’.

• Amendments to IFRIC 14 ‘Prepayments of a Minimum Funding Requirement’.

• ‘Improvements to IFRSs – 2010’.

2. Standards, interpretations and amendments to published standards that are not yet effective

The Group has not early adopted the following new pronouncements that are not yet effective and are evaluating the effect on the financial statements:

• IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’, effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2015. The new standard details the requirements for the classification and measurement of financial assets and liabilities.

F-8

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

a. Basis of preparation continued

• The IASB issued a ‘package of five’ new and amended standards together. IFRS 10 ‘Consolidated Financial Statements’, IFRS 11 ‘Joint Arrangements’ and IFRS 12 ‘Disclosures of Involvement with Other Entities’ have been issued. IAS 27 ‘Separate Financial Statements’ (Revised 2011) has been amended following the issuance of IFRS 10 and retains the guidance for separate financial statements, IAS 28 ‘Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures’ (Revised 2011) has been amended following the issuance of IFRS 10 and IFRS 11. All three new standards and two amended standards are effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2013.

• IFRS 13 ‘Fair Value Measurement’, effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2013. The standard defines fair value and provides guidance on its determination, and introduces disclosure requirements on fair value measurements.

• Amendments to IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial Statements’ – Presentation of Items and Other Comprehensive Income, effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 July 2012. The amendments require the grouping of items in other comprehensive income into those that may be reclassified to profit or loss in subsequent periods, and those that will not.

• Amendments to IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits (2011)’, effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2013. The amendments include the elimination of the corridor approach, changes to the calculation of the net interest component and changes to disclosure.

3. Critical accounting assumptions and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting assumptions. It also requires management to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas requiring a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions and estimates are significant to the consolidated financial statements, are discussed in the relevant accounting policies under the following headings:

•    Intangible assets:	Goodwill
•    Intangible assets:	Pre-publication assets
•    Royalty advances
•    Taxation
•    Employee benefits:	Pension obligations
•    Revenue recognition

b. Consolidation

1. Business combinations The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for business combinations of the Group with an acquisition date on or after 1 January 2010. The consideration transferred for the acquisition of a subsidiary is the fair value of the assets transferred, the liabilities incurred and the equity interest issued by the Group. The consideration transferred includes the fair value of any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration arrangement. Acquisition related costs are expensed as incurred.

F-9

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

b. Consolidation continued

Identifiable assets and contingent assets acquired and identifiable liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date. For material acquisitions, the fair value of the acquired intangible assets is determined by an external, independent valuer. The excess of the consideration transferred, the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and the acquisition date fair value of any previous equity interest in the acquiree over the fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. See note 1e(1) for the accounting policy on goodwill. If this is less than the fair value of the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, in the case of a bargain purchase, the difference is recognised directly in the income statement.

On an acquisition-by-acquisition basis, the Group recognises any non-controlling interest in the acquiree either at fair value or at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s net assets.

2. Subsidiaries Subsidiaries are entities over which the Group has the power to govern the financial and operating policies, generally accompanying a shareholding of more than one half of the voting rights. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group and are de-consolidated from the date that control ceases.

3. Transactions with non-controlling interests Transactions with non-controlling interests are treated as transactions with shareholders. Any surplus or deficit arising from disposals to a non-controlling interest is recorded in equity. For purchases from a non-controlling interest, the difference between consideration paid and the relevant share acquired of the carrying value of the subsidiary is recorded in equity.

4. Joint ventures and associates Joint ventures are entities in which the Group holds an interest on a long-term basis and which are jointly controlled, with one or more other venturers, under a contractual arrangement. Associates are entities over which the Group has significant influence but not the power to control the financial and operating policies, generally accompanying a shareholding of between 20% and 50% of the voting rights. Investments in joint ventures and associates are accounted for by the equity method and are initially recognised at cost.

The Group’s share of its joint ventures’ and associates’ post-acquisition profits or losses is recognised in the income statement and its share of post-acquisition movements in reserves is recognised in reserves. The Group’s share of its joint ventures’ and associates’ results is recognised as a component of operating profit as these operations form part of the core publishing business of the Group and are an integral part of existing wholly-owned businesses. The cumulative post-acquisition movements are adjusted against the carrying amount of the investment. When the Group’s share of losses in a joint venture or associate equals or exceeds its interest in the joint venture or associate the Group does not recognise further losses unless the Group has incurred obligations or made payments on behalf of the joint venture or associate.

c. Foreign currency translation

1. Functional and presentation currency Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured using the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (the ‘functional currency’). The consolidated financial statements are presented in sterling, which is the company’s functional and presentation currency.

F-10

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

c. Foreign currency translation continued

2. Transactions and balances Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at year end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement, except when deferred in equity as qualifying net investment hedges.

3. Group companies The results and financial position of all Group companies that have a functional currency different from the presentation currency are translated into the presentation currency as follows:

i) assets and liabilities are translated at the closing rate at the date of the balance sheet;

ii) income and expenses are translated at average exchange rates;

iii) all resulting exchange differences are recognised as a separate component of equity.

On consolidation, exchange differences arising from the translation of the net investment in foreign entities, and of borrowings and other currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments, are taken to shareholders’ equity. The Group treats specific inter-company loan balances, which are not intended to be repaid in the foreseeable future, as part of its net investment. When a foreign operation is sold, such exchange differences are recognised in the income statement as part of the gain or loss on sale.

The principal overseas currency for the Group is the US dollar. The average rate for the year against sterling was $1.60 (2010: $1.54) and the year end rate was $1.55 (2010: $1.57).

d. Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost less depreciation. Land is not depreciated. Depreciation on other assets is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate their cost less their residual values over their estimated useful lives as follows:

Buildings (freehold):	20 – 50 years
Buildings (leasehold):	over the period of the lease
Plant and equipment:	3 – 10 years

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date.

The carrying value of an asset is written down to its recoverable amount if the carrying value of the asset is greater than its estimated recoverable amount.

e. Intangible assets

1. Goodwill For the acquisition of subsidiaries made on or after 1 January 2010 goodwill represents the excess of the consideration transferred, the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and the acquisition date fair value of any previous equity interest in the acquiree over the fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired. For the acquisition of subsidiaries made from the date of transition to IFRS to 31 December 2009 goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the net identifiable assets acquired. Goodwill on acquisitions of subsidiaries is included in intangible assets. Goodwill on acquisition of associates and joint ventures represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the net identifiable assets acquired. Goodwill on acquisitions of associates and joint ventures is included in investments in associates and joint ventures.

F-11

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

e. Intangible assets continued

Goodwill is tested annually for impairment and carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. An impairment loss is recognised to the extent that the carrying value of goodwill exceeds the recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value in use. These calculations require the use of estimates and significant management judgement. A description of the key assumptions and sensitivities is included in note 11. Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units for the purpose of impairment testing. The allocation is made to those cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from the business combination in which the goodwill arose.

Gains and losses on the disposal of an entity include the carrying amount of goodwill relating to the entity sold.

IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’ has not been applied retrospectively to business combinations before the date of transition to IFRS.

2. Acquired software Software separately acquired for internal use is capitalised at cost. Software acquired in material business combinations is capitalised at its fair value as determined by an independent valuer. Acquired software is amortised on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful life of between three and eight years.

3. Internally developed software Internal and external costs incurred during the preliminary stage of developing computer software for internal use are expensed as incurred. Internal and external costs incurred to develop computer software for internal use during the application development stage are capitalised if the Group expects economic benefits from the development. Capitalisation in the application development stage begins once the Group can reliably measure the expenditure attributable to the software development and has demonstrated its intention to complete and use the software. Internally developed software is amortised on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful life of between three and eight years.

4. Acquired intangible assets Acquired intangible assets include customer lists and relationships, trademarks and brands, publishing rights, content and technology. These assets are capitalised on acquisition at cost and included in intangible assets. Intangible assets acquired in material business combinations are capitalised at their fair value as determined by an independent valuer. Intangible assets are amortised over their estimated useful lives of between two and 20 years, using an amortisation method that reflects the pattern of their consumption.

5. Pre-publication assets Pre-publication assets represent direct costs incurred in the development of educational programmes and titles prior to their publication. These costs are recognised as current intangible assets where the title will generate probable future economic benefits and costs can be measured reliably. Pre-publication assets are amortised upon publication of the title over estimated economic lives of five years or less, being an estimate of the expected operating life cycle of the title, with a higher proportion of the amortisation taken in the earlier years.

The investment in pre-publication assets has been disclosed as part of cash generated from operations in the cash flow statement (see note 33).

The assessment of the recoverability of pre-publication assets and the determination of the amortisation profile involve a significant degree of judgement based on historical trends and management estimation of future potential sales. An incorrect amortisation profile could result in excess amounts being carried forward as intangible assets that would otherwise have been written off to the income statement in an earlier period.

Reviews are performed regularly to estimate recoverability of pre-publication assets. The carrying amount of pre-publication assets is set out in note 20.

F-12

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

f. Other financial assets

Other financial assets, designated as available for sale investments, are non-derivative financial assets measured at estimated fair value. Changes in the fair value are recorded in equity in the fair value reserve. On the subsequent disposal of the asset, the net fair value gains or losses are taken to the income statement.

g. Inventories

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is determined using the first in first out (FIFO) method. The cost of finished goods and work in progress comprises raw materials, direct labour, other direct costs and related production overheads. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business, less estimated costs necessary to make the sale. Provisions are made for slow moving and obsolete stock.

h. Royalty advances

Advances of royalties to authors are included within trade and other receivables when the advance is paid less any provision required to adjust the advance to its net realisable value. The realisable value of royalty advances relies on a degree of management judgement in determining the profitability of individual author contracts. If the estimated realisable value of author contracts is overstated, this will have an adverse effect on operating profits as these excess amounts will be written off.

The recoverability of royalty advances is based upon an annual detailed management review of the age of the advance, the future sales projections for new authors and prior sales history of repeat authors. The royalty advance is expensed at the contracted or effective royalty rate as the related revenues are earned. Royalty advances which will be consumed within one year are held in current assets. Royalty advances which will be consumed after one year are held in non-current assets.

i. Newspaper development costs

Investment in the development of newspaper titles consists of measures to increase the volume and geographical spread of circulation. The measures include additional and enhanced editorial content, extended distribution and remote printing. These costs are expensed as incurred as they do not meet the criteria under IAS 38 ‘Intangible Assets’ to be capitalised as intangible assets.

j. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents in the cash flow statement include cash in hand, deposits held on call with banks, other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less, and bank overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are included in borrowings in current liabilities in the balance sheet.

Short-term deposits and marketable securities with maturities of greater than three months do not qualify as cash and cash equivalents. Movements on these financial instruments are classified as cash flows from financing activities in the cash flow statement as these amounts are used to offset the borrowings of the Group.

k. Share capital

Ordinary shares are classified as equity.

F-13

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

k. Share capital continued

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Where any Group company purchases the company’s equity share capital (treasury shares) the consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs, net of income taxes, is deducted from equity attributable to the company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled, reissued or disposed of. Where such shares are subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable transaction costs and the related income tax effects, is included in equity attributable to the company’s equity holders.

l. Borrowings

Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, which is proceeds received net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently stated at amortised cost with any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value being recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method. Accrued interest is included as part of borrowings. Where a debt instrument is in a fair value hedging relationship, an adjustment is made to its carrying value in the income statement to reflect the hedged risk. Interest on borrowings is expensed in the income statement as incurred.

m. Derivative financial instruments

Derivatives are recognised at fair value and re-measured at each balance sheet date. The fair value of derivatives is determined by using market data and the use of established estimation techniques such as discounted cash flow and option valuation models. The Group designates certain of the derivative instruments within its portfolio to be hedges of the fair value of its bonds (fair value hedges) or hedges of net investments in foreign operations (net investment hedges).

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with any changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk.

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as net investment hedges are recognised in other comprehensive income. Gains and losses accumulated in equity are included in the income statement when the corresponding foreign operation is disposed of. Gains or losses relating to the ineffective portion are recognised immediately in finance income or finance costs in the income statement.

Certain derivatives do not qualify or are not designated as hedging instruments. Such derivatives are classified at fair value and any movement in their fair value is recognised immediately in finance income or finance costs in the income statement.

n. Taxation

Current tax is recognised on the amounts expected to be paid or recovered under the tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Deferred income tax is provided, using the liability method, on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts. Deferred income tax is determined using tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and are expected to apply when the related deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred income tax liability is settled.

F-14

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

n. Taxation continued

Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary differences can be utilised.

Deferred income tax is provided in respect of the undistributed earnings of subsidiaries other than where it is intended that those undistributed earnings will not be remitted in the foreseeable future.

Current and deferred tax are recognised in the income statement, except when the tax relates to items charged or credited directly to equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the tax is also recognised in equity or other comprehensive income.

The Group is subject to income taxes in numerous jurisdictions. Significant judgement is required in determining the estimates in relation to the worldwide provision for income taxes. There are many transactions and calculations for which the ultimate tax determination is uncertain during the ordinary course of business. The Group recognises liabilities for anticipated tax audit issues based on estimates of whether additional taxes will be due. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts that were initially recorded, such differences will impact the income tax and deferred tax provisions in the period in which such determination is made.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities require management judgement in determining the amounts to be recognised. In particular, significant judgement is used when assessing the extent to which deferred tax assets should be recognised with consideration given to the timing and level of future taxable income together with any future tax planning strategies.

o. Employee benefits

1. Pension obligations The retirement benefit asset and obligation recognised in the balance sheet represents the net of the present value of the defined benefit obligation and the fair value of plan assets at the balance sheet date. The defined benefit obligation is calculated annually by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method. The present value of the defined benefit obligation is determined by discounting estimated future cash flows using yields on high quality corporate bonds which have terms to maturity approximating the terms of the related liability.

The determination of the pension cost and defined benefit obligation of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes depends on the selection of certain assumptions, which include the discount rate, inflation rate, salary growth, longevity and expected return on scheme assets.

Actuarial gains and losses arising from differences between actual and expected returns on plan assets, experience adjustments on liabilities and changes in actuarial assumptions are recognised immediately in other comprehensive income.

The service cost, representing benefits accruing over the year, is included in the income statement as an operating cost. The unwinding of the discount rate on the scheme liabilities and the expected return on scheme assets are presented as finance costs or finance income.

Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension plans are recognised as an operating expense in the income statement as incurred.

F-15

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

o. Employee benefits continued

2. Other post-retirement obligations The expected costs of post-retirement healthcare and life assurance benefits are accrued over the period of employment, using a similar accounting methodology as for defined benefit pension obligations. The liabilities and costs relating to significant other post-retirement obligations are assessed annually by independent qualified actuaries.

3. Share-based payments The fair value of options or shares granted under the Group’s share and option plans is recognised as an employee expense after taking into account the Group’s best estimate of the number of awards expected to vest. Fair value is measured at the date of grant and is spread over the vesting period of the option or share. The fair value of the options granted is measured using an option model that is most appropriate to the award. The fair value of shares awarded is measured using the share price at the date of grant unless another method is more appropriate. Any proceeds received are credited to share capital and share premium when the options are exercised.

p. Provisions

Provisions are recognised if the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is more likely than not that an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be reliably estimated. Provisions are discounted to present value where the effect is material.

The Group recognises a provision for deferred consideration at fair value.

The Group recognises a provision for onerous lease contracts when the expected benefits to be derived from a contract are less than the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contract.

The provision is based on the present value of future payments for surplus leased properties under non-cancellable operating leases, net of estimated sub-leasing income.

q. Revenue recognition

Revenue comprises the fair value of the consideration received or receivable for the sale of goods and services net of sales taxes, rebates and discounts, and after eliminating sales within the Group.

Revenue from the sale of books is recognised when title passes. A provision for anticipated returns is made based primarily on historical return rates. If these estimates do not reflect actual returns in future periods then revenues could be understated or overstated for a particular period.

Circulation and advertising revenue is recognised when the newspaper or other publication is published. Subscription revenue is recognised on a straight-line basis over the life of the subscription.

Where a contractual arrangement consists of two or more separate elements that can be provided to customers either on a stand-alone basis or as an optional extra, such as the provision of supplementary materials with textbooks, revenue is recognised for each element as if it were an individual contractual arrangement.

Revenue from multi-year contractual arrangements, such as contracts to process qualifying tests for individual professions and government departments, is recognised as performance occurs. The assumptions, risks, and uncertainties inherent in long-term contract accounting can affect the amounts and timing of revenue and related expenses reported. Certain of these arrangements, either as a result of a single service spanning more than one

F-16

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

1. Accounting policies continued

q. Revenue recognition continued

reporting period or where the contract requires the provision of a number of services that together constitute a single project, are treated as long-term contracts with revenue recognised on a percentage of completion basis. Losses on contracts are recognised in the period in which the loss first becomes foreseeable. Contract losses are determined to be the amount by which estimated total costs of the contract exceed the estimated total revenues that will be generated by the contract.

On certain contracts, where the Group acts as agent, only commissions and fees receivable for services rendered are recognised as revenue. Any third-party costs incurred on behalf of the principal that are rechargeable under the contractual arrangement are not included in revenue.

Income from recharges of freight and other activities which are incidental to the normal revenue generating activities is included in other income.

r. Leases

Leases of property, plant and equipment where the Group has substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as finance leases. Finance leases are capitalised at the commencement of the lease at the lower of the fair value of the leased property and the present value of the minimum lease payments. Each lease payment is allocated between the liability and finance charges to achieve a constant rate on the finance balance outstanding. The corresponding rental obligations, net of finance charges, are included in financial liabilities – borrowings. The interest element of the finance cost is charged to the income statement over the lease period to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The property, plant and equipment acquired under finance leases are depreciated over the shorter of the useful life of the asset or the lease term.

Leases where a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership are retained by the lessor are classified as operating leases by the lessee. Payments made under operating leases (net of any incentives received from the lessor) are charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease.

s. Dividends

Dividends are recorded in the Group’s financial statements in the period in which they are approved by the company’s shareholders. Interim dividends are recorded in the period in which they are approved and paid.

t. Non-current assets and liabilities held for sale

Assets and liabilities are classified as held for sale and stated at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell if it is intended to recover their carrying amount principally through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. No depreciation is charged in respect of non-current assets classified as held for sale. Amounts relating to non-current assets and liabilities held for sale are classified as discontinued operations in the income statement where appropriate.

u. Trade receivables

Trade receivables are stated at fair value after provision for bad and doubtful debts and anticipated future sales returns (see also note 1q).

F-17

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information

The Group is organised into five business segments:

North American Education Educational publishing, assessment and testing for the school and higher education market within the USA and Canada;

International Education Educational publishing, assessment and testing for the school and higher education market outside of North America;

Professional Business and technology publishing, training, testing and certification for professional bodies;

FT Group Publisher of the Financial Times, business magazines and specialist information;

Penguin Publisher with brand imprints such as Penguin, Putnam, Berkley, Viking and Dorling Kindersley.

For more detail on the services and products included in each business segment refer to the business review.

F-18

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information continued

The results of the Interactive Data segment are shown as discontinued for the period until its disposal on 29 July 2010.

			2011
All figures in £ millions	Notes		North American Education			International Education			Professional			FT Group			Penguin			Corporate		Discontinued operations		Group
Continuing operations
Sales (external)				2,584			1,424			382			427			1,045			—		—		5,862
Sales (inter-segment)				3			—			9			—			2			—		—		14
Adjusted operating profit				493			196			66			76			111			—		—		942
Amortisation of acquired intangibles				(57	)		(60	)		(11	)		(8	)		(3	)		—		—		(139	)
Acquisition costs				(2	)		(9	)		—			(1	)		—			—		—		(12	)
Other net gains and losses				29			(6	)		—			412			—			—		—		435
Operating profit				463			121			55			479			108			—		—		1,226
Finance costs		6																					(97	)
Finance income		6																					26
Profit before tax																							1,155
Income tax		7																					(199	)
Profit for the year from continuing operations																							956
Segment assets				5,198			2,388			626			424			1,021			1,555		—		11,212
Joint ventures		12		—			16			—			1			1			—		—		18
Associates		12		1			8			—			4			1			—		—		14
Total assets				5,199			2,412			626			429			1,023			1,555		—		11,244
Other segment items
Share of results of joint ventures and associates		12		—			(2	)		1			34			—			—		—		33
Capital expenditure		10, 11		75			33			17			19			12			—		—		156
Pre-publication investment		20		237			60			2			—			32			—		—		331
Depreciation		10		36			14			8			4			8			—		—		70
Amortisation		11, 20		309			128			16			20			45			—		—		518

F-19

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information continued

			2010
All figures in £ millions	Notes		North American Education			International Education			Professional			FT Group			Penguin			Corporate		Discontinued operations		Group
Continuing operations
Sales (external)				2,640			1,234			333			403			1,053			—		—		5,663
Sales (inter-segment)				—			—			5			—			3			—		—		8
Adjusted operating profit				469			171			51			60			106			—		—		857
Amortisation of acquired intangibles				(53	)		(35	)		(7	)		(9	)		(1	)		—		—		(105	)
Acquisition costs				(1	)		(7	)		(2	)		(1	)		—			—		—		(11	)
Other net gains and losses				—			(10	)		—			12			—			—		—		2
Operating profit				415			119			42			62			105			—		—		743
Finance costs		6																					(109	)
Finance income		6																					36
Profit before tax																							670
Income tax		7																					(146	)
Profit for the year from continuing operations																							524
Segment assets				4,401			2,122			601			447			1,138			1,888		—		10,597
Joint ventures		12		15			—			1			1			1			—		—		18
Associates		12		24			6			—			23			—			—		—		53
Total assets				4,440			2,128			602			471			1,139			1,888		—		10,668
Other segment items
Share of results of joint ventures and associates		12		(3	)		1			1			42			—			—		—		41
Capital expenditure		10, 11		45			27			16			17			18			—		21		144
Pre-publication investment		20		215			61			7			—			36			—		—		319
Depreciation		10		23			19			9			5			13			—		13		82
Amortisation		11, 20		307			111			18			23			43			—		12		514

F-20

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information continued

			2009
All figures in £ millions	Notes		North American Education			International Education			Professional			FT Group			Penguin			Corporate		Discontinued operations		Group
Continuing operations
Sales (external)				2,470			1,035			275			358			1,002			—		—		5,140
Sales (inter-segment)				—			—			7			—			24			—		—		31
Adjusted operating profit				403			141			43			39			84			—		—		710
Amortisation of acquired intangibles				(49	)		(32	)		(1	)		(8	)		(1	)		—		—		(91	)
Operating profit				354			109			42			31			83			—		—		619
Finance costs		6																					(122	)
Finance income		6																					26
Profit before tax																							523
Income tax		7																					(146	)
Profit for the year from continuing operations																							377
Segment assets				4,382			1,635			377			420			1,173			924		471		9,382
Joint ventures		12		13			—			1			1			3			—		—		18
Associates		12		—			5			—			7			—			—		—		12
Total assets				4,395			1,640			378			428			1,176			924		471		9,412
Other segment items
Share of results of joint ventures and associates		12		(2	)		6			1			25			—			—		—		30
Capital expenditure		10,11		38			22			12			15			10			—		29		126
Pre-publication investments		20		220			58			8			—			36			—		—		322
Depreciation		10		24			16			10			5			9			—		21		85
Amortisation		11,20		274			89			13			20			42			—		16		454

In 2011, sales from the provision of goods were £4,054m (2010: £4,200m; 2009: £3,838m) and sales from the provision of services were £1,808m (2010: £1,463m; 2009: £1,302m). Sales from the Group’s educational publishing, consumer publishing and newspaper business are classified as being from the provision of goods and sales from its assessment and testing and other service businesses are classified as being from the provision of services.

Corporate costs are allocated to business segments on an appropriate basis depending on the nature of the cost and therefore the segment result is equal to the Group operating profit. Inter-segment pricing is determined on an arm’s-length basis. Segment assets consist of property, plant and equipment, intangible assets, inventories, receivables, deferred taxation and other financial assets and exclude cash and cash equivalents and derivative assets. Corporate assets comprise cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities and derivative financial instruments. Capital expenditure comprises additions to property, plant and equipment and software (see notes 10 and 11).

F-21

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2. Segment information continued

Property, plant and equipment and intangible assets acquired through business combination were £404m (2010: £311m) (see note 30). Capital expenditure, depreciation and amortisation include amounts relating to discontinued operations.

The Group operates in the following main geographic areas:

	Sales						Non-current assets
All figures in £ millions	2011		2010		2009		2011		2010		2009
Continuing operations
UK		865		790		694		1,237		1,031		904
Other European countries		471		415		387		225		237		179
USA		3,313		3,361		3,146		4,325		3,790		3,607
Canada		209		228		198		226		235		204
Asia Pacific		646		577		497		570		364		319
Other countries		358		292		218		325		376		121
Total continuing		5,862		5,663		5,140		6,908		6,033		5,334
Discontinued operations
UK		—		31		54		—		—		37
Other European countries		—		48		86		—		—		63
USA		—		196		317		—		—		204
Canada		—		2		2		—		—		—
Asia Pacific		—		18		23		—		—		21
Other countries		—		1		2		—		—		—
Total discontinued		—		296		484		—		—		325
Total		5,862		5,959		5,624		6,908		6,033		5,659

Sales are allocated based on the country in which the customer is located. This does not differ materially from the location where the order is received. The geographical split of non-current assets is based on the subsidiary’s country of domicile. This is not materially different to the location of the assets. Non-current assets comprise property, plant and equipment, intangible assets, investments in joint ventures and associates and trade and other receivables.

3. Discontinued operations

Discontinued operations in 2010 and 2009 relate to the Group’s interest in Interactive Data (sold on 29 July 2010).

There were no discontinued operations in 2011.

F-22

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

3. Discontinued operations continued

An analysis of the results and cash flows of discontinued operations is as follows:

	2011		2010			2009
All figures in £ millions	Interactive Data		Interactive Data			Interactive Data
Sales		—		296			484
Operating profit		—		73			136
Finance income		—		—			1
Profit before tax		—		73			137
Attributable tax expense		—		(28	)		(52	)
Profit after tax		—		45			85
Profit on disposal of discontinued operations before tax		—		1,037			—
Attributable tax expense		—		(306	)		—
Profit for the year from discontinued operations		—		776			85
Operating cash flows		—		85			132
Investing cash flows		—		(35	)		(23	)
Financing cash flows		—		49			(80	)
Total cash flows		—		99			29

4. Operating expenses

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010			2009
By function:
Cost of goods sold		2,624			2,588			2,382
Operating expenses
Distribution costs		273			298			275
Administrative and other expenses		2,342			2,190			2,014
Other income		(158	)		(115	)		(120	)
Total net operating expenses		2,457			2,373			2,169
Total		5,081			4,961			4,551

Included in other income in 2011 is a profit of £29m on the sale of an investment and a gain of £8m on a stepped acquisition. Both these items are excluded from adjusted earnings.

F-23

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

4. Operating expenses continued

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010			2009
By nature:
Utilisation of inventory		21		829			836			843
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment		10		70			69			64
Amortisation of intangible assets – Pre-publication		20		331			350			307
Amortisation of intangible assets – Other		11		187			152			131
Employee benefit expense		5		1,983			1,849			1,725
Operating lease rentals				185			166			157
Other property costs				50			50			70
Royalties expensed				500			524			479
Advertising, promotion and marketing				280			250			219
Information technology costs				77			78			72
Other costs				747			752			604
Other income				(158	)		(115	)		(120	)
Total				5,081			4,961			4,551

During the year the Group obtained the following services from the Group’s auditors:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010		2009
Fees payable to the company’s auditors for the audit of parent company and consolidated financial statements		4		4		4
The audit of the company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation		2		2		2
Tax services		2		2		2
Other services		1		2		1
Total		9		10		9

Reconciliation between audit and non-audit service fees is shown below:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010		2009
Group audit fees including fees for attestation under section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act		6		6		6
Non-audit fees		3		4		3
Total		9		10		9

Fees for attestation under section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act are allocated between fees payable for the audits of consolidated and subsidiary accounts.

Tax services include services related to tax planning and various other tax advisory matters. Other services mainly relate to due diligence on acquisitions.

F-24

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

5. Employee information

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011		2010		2009
Employee benefit expense
Wages and salaries (including termination benefits and restructuring costs)				1,711		1,603		1,507
Social security costs				136		121		113
Share-based payment costs		26		40		35		27
Retirement benefits – defined contribution plans		25		69		66		60
Retirement benefits – defined benefit plans		25		24		22		16
Other post-retirement benefits		25		3		2		2
Total				1,983		1,849		1,725

The details of the emoluments of the directors of Pearson plc are shown in the report on directors’ remuneration.

Average number employed	2011		2010		2009
Employee numbers
North American Education		16,133		14,828		15,606
International Education		13,646		10,713		8,899
Professional		4,561		3,721		2,662
FT Group		2,765		2,557		2,328
Penguin		3,557		3,470		4,163
Other		859		1,028		1,047
Continuing operations		41,521		36,317		34,705

The average number employed in discontinued operations in 2009 was 2,459.

6. Net finance costs

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010			2009
Interest payable				(66	)		(82	)		(92	)
Net finance costs in respect of retirement benefits		25		—			(12	)		(12	)
Finance cost of put options and deferred consideration associated with acquisitions				(4	)		—			—
Net foreign exchange losses				(22	)		(9	)		(7	)
Other losses on financial instruments in a hedging relationship:
– fair value hedges				—			—			(1	)
Other losses on financial instruments not in a hedging relationship:
– derivatives				(5	)		(6	)		(10	)
Finance costs				(97	)		(109	)		(122	)
Interest receivable				11			9			6
Net finance income in respect of retirement benefits		25		3			—			—
Net foreign exchange gains				11			18			—
Other gains on financial instruments in a hedging relationship:
– fair value hedges				—			—			4
Other gains on financial instruments not in a hedging relationship:
– amortisation of transitional adjustment on bonds				1			2			3
– derivatives				—			7			13
Finance income				26			36			26
Net finance costs				(71	)		(73	)		(96	)

F-25

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

6. Net finance costs continued

The £nil net gain (2010: £nil; 2009: £3m net gain) on fair value hedges comprises a £39m loss (2010: £40m loss; 2009: £96m gain) on the underlying bonds offset by a £39m gain (2010: £40m gain; 2009: £93m loss) on the related derivative financial instruments.

7. Income tax

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010			2009
Current tax
Charge in respect of current year				(205	)		(82	)		(106	)
Adjustments in respect of prior years				43			13			7
Total current tax charge				(162	)		(69	)		(99	)
Deferred tax
In respect of temporary differences				(35	)		(77	)		(51	)
Adjustments in respect of prior years				(2	)		—			4
Total deferred tax charge		13		(37	)		(77	)		(47	)
Total tax charge				(199	)		(146	)		(146	)

The tax on the Group’s profit before tax differs from the theoretical amount that would arise using the UK tax rate as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010			2009
Profit before tax		1,155			670			523
Tax calculated at UK rate (2011: 26.5%, 2010: 28%, 2009: 28%)		(306	)		(188	)		(147	)
Effect of overseas tax rates		(35	)		(40	)		(27	)
Joint venture and associate income reported net of tax		9			11			8
Net income not subject to tax		6			8			8
Gain on sale of businesses not subject to tax		88			—			—
Utilisation of previously unrecognised tax losses and credits		1			56			2
Unutilised tax losses		(3	)		(6	)		(1	)
Adjustments in respect of prior years		41			13			11
Total tax charge		(199	)		(146	)		(146	)
UK		(15	)		(28	)		(41	)
Overseas		(184	)		(118	)		(105	)
Total tax charge		(199	)		(146	)		(146	)
Tax rate reflected in earnings		17.2	%		21.8	%		27.9	%

A number of changes to the UK corporation tax system were announced in the June 2010 Budget Statement. The Finance (No.2) Act 2010 was enacted in July 2010 and reduced the main rate of corporation tax from 28% to 27% from 1 April 2011. The March 2011 Budget further reduced the rate of corporation tax from 1 April 2011 to 26% and this was substantially enacted at the end of March 2011. The Finance (No. 3) Act 2011 was enacted in July 2011 and reduces the main rate of corporation tax to 25% from 1 April 2012. The reduction in the rate of corporation tax to 25% did not result in a significant movement in the net deferred tax asset owing to the size of the net deferred tax asset in the UK.

F-26

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

7. Income tax continued

The tax rate reflected in adjusted earnings is calculated as follows:

The tax benefit/(charge) recognised in other comprehensive income is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010			2009
Pension contributions and actuarial gains and losses		7			(42	)		79
Net investment hedges and other foreign exchange gains and losses		(4	)		1			12
		3			(41	)		91

A tax benefit of £3m (2010: tax benefit £4m; 2009 tax benefit £6m) relating to share-based payments has been recognised directly in equity.

8. Earnings per share

Basic

Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit attributable to equity shareholders of the company by the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the year, excluding ordinary shares purchased by the company and held as treasury shares.

Diluted

Diluted earnings per share is calculated by adjusting the weighted average number of ordinary shares to take account of all dilutive potential ordinary shares and adjusting the profit attributable, if applicable, to account for any tax consequences that might arise from conversion of those shares.

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011		2010			2009
Profit for the year from continuing operations				956		524			377
Non-controlling interest				1		5			(1	)
Earnings from continuing operations				957		529			376
Profit for the year from discontinued operations		3		—		776			85
Non-controlling interest				—		(8	)		(36	)
Earnings				957		1,297			425
Weighted average number of shares (millions)				800.2		801.2			799.3
Effect of dilutive share options (millions)				1.7		1.8			0.8
Weighted average number of shares (millions) for diluted earnings				801.9		803.0			800.1
Earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations
Basic				119.6p		161.9p			53.2p
Diluted				119.3p		161.5p			53.1p
Earnings per share from continuing operations
Basic				119.6p		66.0p			47.0p
Diluted				119.3p		65.9p			47.0p
Earnings per share from discontinued operations
Basic				—		95.9p			6.2p

F-27

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

9. Dividends

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010		2009
Final paid in respect of prior year 25.7p (2010: 23.3p; 2009: 22.0p)		206		187		176
Interim paid in respect of current year 14.0p (2010: 13.0p; 2009: 12.2p)		112		105		97
		318		292		273

The directors are proposing a final dividend in respect of the financial year ended 31 December 2011 of 28.0p per share which will absorb an estimated £225m of shareholders’ funds. It will be paid on 4 May 2012 to shareholders who are on the register of members on 10 April 2012. These financial statements do not reflect this dividend.

10. Property, plant and equipment

All figures in £ millions	Land and buildings			Plant and equipment			Assets in course of construction			Total
Cost
At 1 January 2010		348			815			7			1,170
Exchange differences		8			28			—			36
Additions		21			55			12			88
Disposals		(4	)		(58	)		—			(62	)
Acquisition through business combination		8			25			—			33
Disposal through business disposal		(48	)		(201	)		—			(249	)
Reclassifications		3			5			(8	)		—
At 31 December 2010		336			669			11			1,016
Exchange differences		2			(2	)		—			—
Additions		15			51			13			79
Disposals		(13	)		(31	)		—			(44	)
Acquisition through business combination		11			21			—			32
Disposal through business disposal		—			(2	)		—			(2	)
Reclassifications		12			—			(12	)		—
At 31 December 2011		363			706			12			1,081

F-28

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

10. Property, plant and equipment continued

All figures in £ millions	Land and buildings			Plant and equipment			Assets in course of construction		Total
Depreciation
At 1 January 2010		(174	)		(608	)		—		(782	)
Exchange differences		(4	)		(19	)		—		(23	)
Charge for the year		(16	)		(66	)		—		(82	)
Disposals		3			58			—		61
Acquisition through business combination		(3	)		(13	)		—		(16	)
Disposal through business disposal		28			164			—		192
At 31 December 2010		(166	)		(484	)		—		(650	)
Exchange differences		(1	)		1			—		—
Charge for the year		(16	)		(54	)		—		(70	)
Disposals		2			29			—		31
Acquisition through business combination		(1	)		(10	)		—		(11	)
Disposal through business disposal		—			2			—		2
Reclassifications		(5	)		5			—		—
At 31 December 2011		(187	)		(511	)		—		(698	)
Carrying amounts
At 1 January 2010		174			207			7		388
At 31 December 2010		170			185			11		366
At 31 December 2011		176			195			12		383

Depreciation expense of £15m (2010: £10m) has been included in the income statement in cost of goods sold, £10m (2010: £7m) in distribution expenses and £45m (2010: £52m) in administrative and other expenses. In 2011 £nil (2010: £13m) relates to discontinued operations.

The Group leases certain equipment under a number of finance lease agreements. The net carrying amount of leased plant and equipment included within property, plant and equipment was £18m (2010: £12m).

F-29

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

11. Intangible assets

All figures in £ millions	Goodwill			Software			Acquired customer lists and relationships			Acquired trademarks and brands			Acquired publishing rights			Other intangibles acquired			Total
Cost
At 1 January 2010		4,346			339			347			143			215			261			5,651
Exchange differences		140			9			10			4			9			10			182
Additions – internal development		—			41			—			—			—			—			41
Additions – purchased		—			15			—			—			—			—			15
Disposals		(11	)		(18	)		—			—			—			—			(29	)
Acquisition through business combination		288			9			159			40			6			76			578
Disposal through business disposal		(195	)		(43	)		(85	)		(1	)		—			(41	)		(365	)
At 31 December 2010		4,568			352			431			186			230			306			6,073
Exchange differences		15			(1	)		1			(1	)		(12	)		(1	)		1
Additions – internal development		—			49			—			—			—			—			49
Additions – purchased		—			28			—			—			—			—			28
Disposals		—			(9	)		—			—			—			—			(9	)
Acquisition through business combination		620			9			200			68			—			100			997
Disposal through business disposal		(4	)		—			—			—			(5	)		—			(9	)
At 31 December 2011		5,199			428			632			253			213			405			7,130

All figures in £ millions	Goodwill		Software			Acquired customer lists and relationships			Acquired trademarks and brands			Acquired publishing rights			Other intangibles acquired			Total
Amortisation
At 1 January 2010		—		(224	)		(96	)		(27	)		(85	)		(90	)		(522	)
Exchange differences		—		(5	)		(3	)		(2	)		(2	)		(1	)		(13	)
Charge for the year		—		(51	)		(39	)		(12	)		(24	)		(38	)		(164	)
Disposals		—		16			—			—			—			—			16
Acquisition through business combination		—		(5	)		—			—			—			—			(5	)
Disposal through business disposal		—		19			35			—			—			28			82
At 31 December 2010		—		(250	)		(103	)		(41	)		(111	)		(101	)		(606	)
Exchange differences		—		(2	)		1			—			4			(3	)		—
Charge for the year		—		(48	)		(55	)		(22	)		(22	)		(40	)		(187	)
Disposals		—		6			—			—			—			—			6
Acquisition through business combination		—		(2	)		—			—			—			—			(2	)
Disposal through business disposal		—		—			—			—			1			—			1
At 31 December 2011		—		(296	)		(157	)		(63	)		(128	)		(144	)		(788	)
Carrying amounts
At 1 January 2010		4,346		115			251			116			130			171			5,129
At 31 December 2010		4,568		102			328			145			119			205			5,467
At 31 December 2011		5,199		132			475			190			85			261			6,342

F-30

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

11. Intangible assets continued

Goodwill

The goodwill carrying value of £5,199m relates to acquisitions completed after 1 January 1998. Prior to 1 January 1998 all goodwill was written off to reserves on the date of acquisition. £3,138m of the carrying value relates to acquisitions completed between 1 January 1998 and 31 December 2002 and £2,061m relates to acquisitions completed after 1 January 2003 (the date of transition to IFRS).

For acquisitions completed between 1 January 1998 and 31 December 2002 no value was ascribed to intangibles other than goodwill and the goodwill on each acquisition was amortised over a period of up to 20 years. On adoption of IFRS on 1 January 2003, the Group chose not to restate the goodwill balance and at that date the balance was frozen (i.e. amortisation ceased). If goodwill had been restated then a significant value would have been ascribed to other intangible assets, which would be subject to amortisation, and the carrying value of goodwill would be significantly lower. For acquisitions completed after 1 January 2003 value has been ascribed to other intangible assets which are amortised.

Other intangible assets

Other intangibles acquired include content, technology, contracts and software rights.

Amortisation of £10m (2010: £3m) is included in the income statement in cost of goods sold and £177m (2010: £149m) in administrative and other expenses. In 2011 £nil (2010: £12m) of amortisation relates to discontinued operations.

Impairment tests for cash-generating units containing goodwill

Impairment tests have been carried out where appropriate as described below. The recoverable amount for each unit tested exceeds its carrying value.

Goodwill in respect of continuing operations is allocated to 13 cash-generating units (CGUs) within the business segments as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
US Education Publishing		2,127		1,976
US School Assessment and Information		792		683
Canada		192		197
International – Emerging Markets		508		310
International – UK		460		398
International – Rest Of World		228		205
Professional Publishing		13		13
Professional Assessment and Training		377		287
Pearson Education total		4,697		4,069
Financial Times		49		48
Mergermarket		138		136
FT Group total		187		184
Penguin US		198		196
Penguin UK		102		103
Penguin Asia Pacific & International		15		16
Penguin total		315		315
Total goodwill		5,199		4,568

F-31

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

11. Intangible assets continued

Following a reorganisation within the International Education business the CGUs have been re-analysed into Emerging Markets, UK and Rest Of World to align with the management and reporting structure. The goodwill has been reallocated accordingly.

The recoverable amount of each CGU is based on value in use calculations. Goodwill is tested for impairment annually. Other than goodwill there are no intangible assets with indefinite lives. The goodwill is generally denominated in the currency of the relevant cash flows and therefore the impairment review is not materially sensitive to exchange rate fluctuations.

Key assumptions

The value in use calculations use cash flow projections based on financial budgets approved by management covering a five-year period. The key assumptions used by management in the value in use calculations were:

Discount rate The discount rate is based on the risk-free rate for government bonds, adjusted for a risk premium to reflect the increased risk in investing in equities. The risk premium adjustment is assessed for each specific CGU. The average pre-tax discount rates used are in the range of 10.7% to 13.3% for the Pearson Education businesses (2010: 11.2% to 12.1%), 11.6% to 17.9% for the FT Group businesses (2010: 12.9% to 20.0%) and 10.7% to 12.5% for the Penguin businesses (2010: 10.5% to 13.0%).

Impairment tests for cash-generating units containing goodwill

Perpetuity growth rates A perpetuity growth rate of 2.0% was used for cash flows subsequent to the approved budget period for all CGUs in 2011 (2010: 2.0%). This perpetuity growth rate is a conservative rate and is considered to be lower than the long-term historic growth rates of the underlying territories in which the CGU operates and the long-term growth rate prospects of the sectors in which the CGU operates.

Cash flow growth rates The cash flow growth rates are derived from management’s latest forecast of sales taking into consideration experience of operating margins achieved in the CGU. Historically, such forecasts have been reasonably accurate.

Sensitivities

The Group’s impairment review is sensitive to a change in assumptions used, most notably the discount rates, the perpetuity growth rates and expected future cash flows. Based on the Group’s sensitivity analysis, a reasonably possible change in any of these assumptions is unlikely to cause an impairment in any of the CGUs.

12. Investments in joint ventures and associates

Joint ventures

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
At beginning of year		18			18
Exchange differences		(3	)		—
Share of loss after tax		(2	)		(1	)
Dividends		(2	)		(3	)
Additions and further investment		7			4
At end of year		18			18

F-32

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

12. Investments in joint ventures and associates continued

Investments in joint ventures are accounted for using the equity method of accounting and are initially recognised at cost. The total goodwill recorded on acquisition of joint ventures at 31 December 2011 was £11m (2010: £12m).

The aggregate of the Group’s share of its joint ventures’ assets (including goodwill) and liabilities, none of which are individually significant, are as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
Assets
Non-current assets		15			15
Current assets		17			14
Liabilities
Non-current liabilities		(1	)		—
Current liabilities		(13	)		(11	)
Net assets		18			18
Income		22			17
Expenses		(24	)		(18	)
Loss after tax		(2	)		(1	)

Associates

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
At beginning of year		53			12
Exchange differences		(3	)		(1	)
Share of profit after tax		35			42
Dividends		(30	)		(20	)
Additions		2			17
Disposals		(15	)		—
Reversal of distribution from associate in excess of carrying value		—			(7	)
Actuarial (losses)/gains on retirement benefit obligations		(8	)		1
Transfer from other financial assets		—			9
Transfer to subsidiary		(20	)		—
At end of year		14			53

In addition to the amounts disclosed above, FTSE International Ltd paid royalties of £13m (2010: £11m) to the FT Group during the year. This royalty payment ceased upon the disposal of FTSE International Ltd.

Included in the share of profit after tax in 2010 is a gain in fair value of £12m arising on a stepped acquisition by FTSE International Ltd.

Investments in associates are accounted for using the equity method of accounting and are initially recognised at cost. The total goodwill recorded on acquisition of associates at 31 December 2011 was £nil (2010: £21m).

F-33

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

12. Investments in joint ventures and associates continued

The Group’s interests in its principal associates, all of which are unlisted, are as follows:

	2011
All figures in £ millions	Country of incorporation		% interest held		Assets		Liabilities			Revenues		Profit
The Economist Newspaper Ltd		England		50		140		(140	)		179		27
FTSE International Ltd*		England		50		—		—			31		7
Other						16		(2	)		15		1
Total						156		(142	)		225		35

* FTSE International Ltd included to date of disposal

	2010
All figures in £ millions	Country of incorporation		% interest held		Assets		Liabilities			Revenues		Profit
The Economist Newspaper Ltd		England		50		129		(129	)		169		25
FTSE International Ltd		England		50		62		(44	)		45		17
Other						41		(6	)		9		—
Total						232		(179	)		223		42

The interests held in associates are equivalent to voting rights.

On 16 December 2011 the Group sold its 50% interest in FTSE International Ltd.

Gain on sale of FTSE International Ltd

All figures in £ millions	2011
Proceeds		428
Disposal costs		(1	)
Net assets disposed		(15	)
Gain on sale		412

13. Deferred income tax

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
Deferred income tax assets		287			276
Deferred income tax liabilities		(620	)		(471	)
Net deferred income tax		(333	)		(195	)

Substantially all of the deferred tax assets are expected to be recovered after more than one year.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities may be offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current income tax assets against current income tax liabilities and when the deferred income taxes relate to the same fiscal authority. The Group has unrecognised deferred income tax assets of £13m at 31 December 2011(2010: £14m) in respect of UK losses, and approximately £15m (2010: £16m) in respect of losses in other territories. None of the unrecognised UK losses have expiry dates associated with them.

F-34

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

13. Deferred income tax continued

The recognition of the deferred income tax assets is supported by management’s forecasts of the future profitability of the relevant business units.

The movement on the net deferred income tax account is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010
At beginning of year				(195	)		(86	)
Exchange differences				(5	)		(4	)
Income statement charge		7		(37	)		(72	)
Acquisition through business combination		30		(96	)		(37	)
Disposal through business disposal		31		1			47
Tax charge to other comprehensive income or equity				(1	)		(43	)
At end of year				(333	)		(195	)

Included in the income statement charge above for 2010 is a £5m credit relating to discontinued operations.

The movement in deferred income tax assets and liabilities during the year is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	Trading losses			Goodwill and intangibles			Returns provisions			Retirement benefit obligations			Other			Total
Deferred income tax assets
At 1 January 2010		22			11			92			68			194			387
Exchange differences		1			—			3			—			5			9
Acquisition through business combination		—			—			—			—			4			4
Disposal through business disposal		—			—			—			—			(7	)		(7	)
Income statement (charge)/benefit		(18	)		(7	)		1			(9	)		(35	)		(68	)
Tax (charge)/benefit to other comprehensive income or equity		—			—			—			(53	)		4			(49	)
At 31 December 2010		5			4			96			6			165			276
Exchange differences		—			—			1			—			2			3
Acquisition through business combination		8			—			—			—			1			9
Income statement benefit/(charge)		1			(4	)		(8	)		19			(6	)		2
Tax (charge)/benefit to other comprehensive income or equity		—			—			—			(6	)		3			(3	)
At 31 December 2011		14			—			89			19			165			287

F-35

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

13. Deferred income tax continued

Other deferred income tax assets include temporary differences on share-based payments, inventory and other provisions.

All figures in £ millions	Goodwill and intangibles			Other			Total
Deferred income tax liabilities
At 1 January 2010		(319	)		(154	)		(473	)
Exchange differences		(9	)		(4	)		(13	)
Acquisition through business combination		(41	)		—			(41	)
Disposal through business disposal		25			29			54
Income statement benefit/(charge)		10			(14	)		(4	)
Tax benefit to other comprehensive income or equity		—			6			6
At 31 December 2010		(334	)		(137	)		(471	)
Exchange differences		(6	)		(2	)		(8	)
Acquisition through business combination		(102	)		(3	)		(105	)
Disposal through business disposal		—			1			1
Income statement charge		(22	)		(17	)		(39	)
Tax benefit to other comprehensive income or equity		—			2			2
At 31 December 2011		(464	)		(156	)		(620	)

Other deferred income tax liabilities include temporary differences in respect of depreciation and royalty advances.

F-36

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

14. Classification of financial instruments

The accounting classification of each class of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities, together with their fair values, is as follows:

			2011
			Fair value											Amortised cost
All figures in £ millions	Notes		Available for sale		Derivatives deemed held for trading			Derivatives in hedging relationships			Other liabilities			Loans and receivables		Other liabilities			Total carrying value			Total market value
Investments in unlisted securities		15		26		—			—			—			—		—			26			26
Cash and cash equivalents		17		—		—			—			—			1,369		—			1,369			1,369
Marketable securities				9		—			—			—			—		—			9			9
Derivative financial instruments		16		—		3			174			—			—		—			177			177
Trade receivables		22		—		—			—			—			1,061		—			1,061			1,061
Total financial assets				35		3			174			—			2,430		—			2,642			2,642
Derivative financial instruments		16		—		(1	)		(2	)		—			—		—			(3	)		(3	)
Trade payables		24		—		—			—			—			—		(483	)		(483	)		(483	)
Other financial liabilities – put options over non-controlling interest		24		—		—			—			(86	)		—		—			(86	)		(86	)
Bank loans and overdrafts		18		—		—			—			—			—		(78	)		(78	)		(78	)
Borrowings due within one year		18		—		—			—			—			—		(9	)		(9	)		(9	)
Borrowings due after more than one year		18		—		—			—			—			—		(1,964	)		(1,964	)		(2,000	)
Total financial liabilities				—		(1	)		(2	)		(86	)		—		(2,534	)		(2,623	)		(2,659	)

F-37

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

14. Classification of financial instruments continued

			2010
			Fair value										Amortised cost
All figures in £ millions	Notes		Available for sale		Derivatives deemed held for trading		Derivatives in hedging relationships			Other liabilities			Loans and receivables		Other liabilities			Total carrying value			Total market value
Investments in unlisted securities		15		58		—		—			—			—		—			58			58
Cash and cash equivalents		17		—		—		—			—			1,736		—			1,736			1,736
Marketable securities				12		—		—			—			—		—			12			12
Derivative financial instruments		16		—		8		132			—			—		—			140			140
Trade receivables		22		—		—		—			—			1,031		—			1,031			1,031
Total financial assets				70		8		132			—			2,767		—			2,977			2,977
Derivative financial instruments		16		—		—		(6	)		—			—		—			(6	)		(6	)
Trade payables		24		—		—		—			—			—		(470	)		(470	)		(470	)
Other financial liabilities – put option over non-controlling interest		24		—		—		—			(25	)		—		—			(25	)		(25	)
Bank loans and overdrafts		18		—		—		—			—			—		(73	)		(73	)		(73	)
Borrowings due within one year		18		—		—		—			—			—		(331	)		(331	)		(333	)
Borrowings due after more than one year		18		—		—		—			—			—		(1,908	)		(1,908	)		(1,939	)
Total financial liabilities				—		—		(6	)		(25	)		—		(2,782	)		(2,813	)		(2,846	)

Certain of the Group’s derivative financial instruments are classified as held for trading either as they do not meet the hedge accounting criteria specified in IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’ or the Group has chosen not to seek hedge accounting for these instruments. None of these derivatives are held for speculative trading purposes. Transactions in derivative financial instruments are only undertaken to manage risks arising from underlying business activity, in accordance with the Group’s treasury policy as described in note 19.

The Group designates certain qualifying derivative financial instruments as hedges of the fair value of its bonds (fair value hedges). Changes in the fair value of these derivative financial instruments are recorded in the income statement, together with any change in the fair value of the hedged liability attributable to the hedged risk.

The Group also designates certain of its borrowings and derivative financial instruments as hedges of its investments in foreign operations (net investment hedges). Movements in the fair value of these financial instruments (to the extent they are effective) are recognised in other comprehensive income.

None of the Group’s financial assets or liabilities are designated at fair value through the income statement upon initial recognition.

More detail on the Group’s accounting for financial instruments is included in the Group’s accounting policies. The Group’s approach to managing risks in relation to financial instruments is described in note 19.

F-38

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

15. Other financial assets

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
At beginning of year		58			62
Exchange differences		—			1
Acquisition of investments		12			7
Transfers to associates		—			(9	)
Disposal of investments		(44	)		(3	)
At end of year		26			58

Other financial assets comprise non-current unlisted securities.

16. Derivative financial instruments

The Group’s approach to the management of financial risks is set out in note 19. The Group’s outstanding derivative financial instruments are as follows:

	2011							2010
All figures in £ millions	Gross notional amounts		Assets		Liabilities			Gross notional amounts		Assets		Liabilities
Interest rate derivatives – in a fair value hedge relationship		1,208		151		—			1,327		112		—
Interest rate derivatives – not in a hedge relationship		65		3		(1	)		256		8		—
Cross currency rate derivatives – in a net investment hedge relationship		220		23		(2	)		220		20		(6	)
Total		1,493		177		(3	)		1,803		140		(6	)
Analysed as expiring:
In less than one year		—		—		(1	)		319		6		—
Later than one year and not later than five years		946		81		(2	)		749		74		(6	)
Later than five years		547		96		—			735		60		—
Total		1,493		177		(3	)		1,803		140		(6	)

The carrying value of the above derivative financial instruments equals their fair value. Fair values are determined by using market data and the use of established estimation techniques such as discounted cash flow and option valuation models.

At the end of 2011, the currency split of the mark-to-market values of rate derivatives, including the exchange of principal on cross currency rate derivatives, was US dollar £(66)m, sterling £263m and South African rand £(23)m (2010: US dollar £(97)m, sterling £259m and South African rand £(28)m).

The fixed interest rates on outstanding rate derivative contracts at the end of 2011 range from 3.65% to 9.28% (2010: 3.65% to 9.28%) and the floating rates are based on LIBOR in US dollar and sterling.

The Group’s portfolio of rate derivatives is diversified by maturity, counterparty and type. Natural offsets between transactions within the portfolio and the designation of certain derivatives as hedges significantly reduce the risk of income statement volatility. The sensitivity of the portfolio to changes in market rates is set out in note 19.

F-39

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

16. Derivative financial instruments continued

Counterparty exposure from all derivatives is managed, together with that from deposits and bank account balances, within credit limits that reflect published credit ratings and by reference to other market measures (e.g. market prices for credit default swaps) to ensure that there is no significant risk to any one counterparty. No single derivative transaction had a market value (positive or negative) at the balance sheet date that exceeded 3% of the Group’s consolidated total equity.

In accordance with IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’ the Group has reviewed all of its material contracts for embedded derivatives that are required to be separately accounted for if they do not meet certain requirements, and has concluded that there are no material embedded derivatives.

17. Cash and cash equivalents (excluding overdrafts)

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Cash at bank and in hand		864		763
Short-term bank deposits		505		973
		1,369		1,736

Short-term bank deposits are invested with banks and earn interest at the prevailing short-term deposit rates.

At the end of 2011 the currency split of cash and cash equivalents was US dollar 31% (2010: 73%), sterling 38% (2010: 9%), euro 8% (2010: 6%) and other 23% (2010: 12%).

Cash and cash equivalents have fair values that approximate to their carrying value due to their short-term nature.

Cash and cash equivalents include the following for the purpose of the cash flow statement:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
Cash and cash equivalents		1,369			1,736
Bank overdrafts		(78	)		(72	)
		1,291			1,664

F-40

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Financial liabilities – Borrowings

The Group’s current and non-current borrowings are as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Non-current
5.5% Global Dollar Bonds 2013 (nominal amount $350m)		233		236
5.7% US Dollar Bonds 2014 (nominal amount $400m)		286		288
7.0% Sterling Bonds 2014 (nominal amount £250m)		257		256
6.0% Sterling Bonds 2015 (nominal amount £300m)		298		297
4.0% US Dollar Notes 2016 (nominal amount $350m)		238		227
6.25% Global Dollar Bonds 2018 (nominal amount $550m)		419		389
4.625% US Dollar Notes 2018 (nominal amount $300m)		224		208
Finance lease liabilities		9		7
		1,964		1,908
Current
Due within one year or on demand:
Bank loans and overdrafts		78		73
7.0% Global Dollar Bonds 2011 (nominal amount $500m)		—		325
Finance lease liabilities		9		6
		87		404
Total borrowings		2,051		2,312

Included in the non-current borrowings above is £12m of accrued interest (2010: £12m). Included in the current borrowings above is £nil of accrued interest (2010: £1m).

The maturity of the Group’s non-current borrowing is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Between one and two years		241		4
Between two and five years		1,080		1,080
Over five years		643		824
		1,964		1,908

The carrying amounts and market values of borrowings are as follows:

	2011							2010
All figures in £ millions	Effective interest rate			Carrying value		Market value		Carrying value		Market value
Bank loans and overdrafts		n/a			78		78		73		73
7.0% Global Dollar Bonds 2011		n/a			—		—		325		327
5.5% Global Dollar Bonds 2013		5.76	%		233		237		236		241
5.7% US Dollar Bonds 2014		5.88	%		286		280		288		277
7.0% Sterling Bonds 2014		7.20	%		257		282		256		282
6.0% Sterling Bonds 2015		6.27	%		298		340		297		329
4.0% US Dollar Notes 2016		4.26	%		238		237		227		226
6.25% Global Dollar Bonds 2018		6.46	%		419		409		389		385
4.625% US Dollar Notes 2018		4.69	%		224		206		208		192
Finance lease liabilities		n/a			18		18		13		13
					2,051		2,087		2,312		2,345

F-41

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

18. Financial liabilities – Borrowings continued

The market values stated above are based on clean market prices at the year end or, where these are not available, on the quoted market prices of comparable debt issued by other companies. The effective interest rates above relate to the underlying debt instruments.

The carrying amounts of the Group’s borrowings are denominated in the following currencies:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
US dollar		1,488		1,759
Sterling		563		553
Euro		—		—
		2,051		2,312

The Group has the following undrawn capacity on its committed borrowing facilities as at 31 December:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Floating rate
– expiring within one year		—		—
– expiring beyond one year		1,126		1,118
		1,126		1,118

In addition to the above facilities, there are a number of short-term facilities that are utilised in the normal course of business.

All of the Group’s borrowings are unsecured. In respect of finance lease obligations, the rights to the leased asset revert to the lessor in the event of default.

The maturity of the Group’s finance lease obligations is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Finance lease liabilities – minimum lease payments
Not later than one year		9		6
Later than one year and not later than two years		8		4
Later than two years and not later than three years		1		3
Later than three years and not later than four years		—		—
Later than four years and not later than five years		—		—
Later than five years		—		—
Future finance charges on finance leases		—		—
Present value of finance lease liabilities		18		13

The present value of finance lease liabilities is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Not later than one year		9		6
Later than one year and not later than five years		9		7
Later than five years		—		—
		18		13

The carrying amounts of the Group’s lease obligations approximate their fair value.

F-42

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management

The Group’s approach to the management of financial risks together with sensitivity analyses of its financial instruments is set out below.

Treasury policy

The Group holds financial instruments for two principal purposes: to finance its operations and to manage the interest rate and currency risks arising from its operations and its sources of finance. The Group finances its operations by a mixture of cash flows from operations, short-term borrowings from banks and commercial paper markets, and longer term loans from banks and capital markets. The Group borrows principally in US dollars and sterling, at both floating and fixed rates of interest, using derivative financial instruments (‘derivatives’), where appropriate, to generate the desired effective currency profile and interest rate basis. The derivatives used for this purpose are principally rate swaps, rate caps and collars, currency rate swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts. The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are interest rate risk, liquidity and refinancing risk, counterparty risk and foreign currency risk. These risks are managed by the chief financial officer under policies approved by the board, which are summarised below. All the treasury policies remained unchanged throughout, except for a revision to the Group’s bank counterparty limits.

The audit committee receives reports on the Group’s treasury activities, policies and procedures. The treasury department is not a profit centre and its activities are subject to regular internal audit.

Interest rate risk management

The Group’s exposure to interest rate fluctuations on its borrowings is managed by borrowing on a fixed rate basis and by entering into rate swaps, rate caps and forward rate agreements. The Group’s policy objective has continued to be to set a target proportion of its forecast borrowings (taken at the year end, with cash netted against floating rate debt and before certain adjustments for IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’) to be hedged (i.e. fixed or capped at the year end) over the next four years, subject to a maximum of 65% and a minimum that starts at 40% and falls by 10% at each year end. At the end of 2011 the fixed to floating hedging ratio, on the above basis, was approximately 104%. This above-policy level reflects the receipt of the proceeds from the divestment of FTSE International Ltd in December 2011, combined with strong cash collections, resulting in lower than typical net debt and hence a higher hedging ratio. Our policy does not require us to cancel derivative contracts and we expect to return to compliance with this policy during 2012. A simultaneous 1% change on 1 January 2012 in the Group’s variable interest rates in US dollar and sterling, taking into account forecast seasonal debt, would have a £1m effect on profit before tax.

Use of interest rate derivatives

The policy described in the section above creates a group of derivatives, under which the Group is a payer of fixed rates and a receiver of floating rates. The Group also aims to avoid undue exposure to a single interest rate setting. Reflecting this objective, the Group has predominantly swapped its fixed rate bond issues to floating rate at their launch. This creates a second group of derivatives, under which the Group is a receiver of fixed rates and a payer of floating rates. The Group’s accounting objective in its use of interest rate derivatives is to minimise the impact on the income statement of changes in the mark-to-market value of its derivative portfolio as a whole. It uses duration calculations to estimate the sensitivity of the derivatives to movements in market rates. The Group also identifies which derivatives are eligible for fair value hedge accounting (which reduces sharply the income statement impact of changes in the market value of a derivative). The Group then balances the total portfolio between hedge-accounted and pooled segments, so that the expected movement on the pooled segment is minimal.

F-43

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

Liquidity and refinancing risk management

The Group’s objective is to secure continuity of funding at a reasonable cost. To do this it seeks to arrange committed funding for a variety of maturities from a diversity of sources. The Group’s policy objective has been that the weighted average maturity of its core gross borrowings (treating short-term advances as having the final maturity of the facilities available to refinance them) should be between three and ten years. At the end of 2011 the average maturity of gross borrowings was 4.0 years (2010: 4.4 years) of which bonds represented 95% (2010: 96%) of these borrowings.

The Group believes that ready access to different funding markets also helps to reduce its liquidity risk, and that published credit ratings and published financial policies improve such access. All of the Group’s credit ratings remained unchanged during the year. The long-term ratings are Baa1 from Moody’s and BBB+ from Standard & Poor’s, and the short-term ratings are P2 and A2 respectively. The Group’s policy is to strive to maintain a rating of Baa1/BBB+ over the long term. The Group will also continue to use internally a range of ratios to monitor and manage its finances. These include interest cover, net debt to operating profit and cash flow to debt measures. The Group also maintains undrawn committed borrowing facilities. At the end of 2011 the committed facilities amounted to £1,126m and their weighted average maturity was 3.9 years.

Analysis of Group debt, including the impact of derivatives

The following tables analyse the Group’s sources of funding and the impact of derivatives on the Group’s debt instruments.

The Group’s net debt position is set out below:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
Cash and cash equivalents		1,369			1,736
Marketable securities		9			12
Derivative financial instruments		174			134
Bank loans, overdrafts and loan notes		(78	)		(73	)
Bonds		(1,955	)		(2,226	)
Finance lease liabilities		(18	)		(13	)
Net debt		(499	)		(430	)

The split of net debt between fixed and floating rate, stated after the impact of rate derivatives, is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
Fixed rate		510			577
Floating rate		(11	)		(147	)
Total		499			430

Gross borrowings, after the impact of cross-currency rate derivatives, analysed by currency are as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
US dollar		1,687		1,954
Sterling		343		333
Other		21		25
Total		2,051		2,312

F-44

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

Liquidity and refinancing risk management continued

As at 31 December 2011 the exposure of the borrowings of the Group to interest rate changes when the borrowings re-price is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	Less than one year		One to five years			More than five years			Total
Re-pricing profile of borrowings		87		1,321			643			2,051
Effect of rate derivatives		1,273		(726	)		(547	)		—
Total		1,360		595			96			2,051

The maturity of contracted cash flows associated with the Group’s financial liabilities are as follows:

	2011
All figures in £ millions	USD			GBP			Other		Total
Not later than one year		261			124			156		541
Later than one year and not later than five years		984			378			25		1,387
Later than five years		563			—			—		563
Total		1,808			502			181		2,491
Analysed as:
Bonds		1,553			675			—		2,228
Rate derivatives – inflows		(292	)		(281	)		—		(573	)
Rate derivatives – outflows		321			5			27		353
Trade creditors		226			103			154		483
Total		1,808			502			181		2,491

	2010
All figures in £ millions	USD			GBP			Other		Total
Not later than one year		571			117			160		848
Later than one year and not later than five years		767			399			32		1,198
Later than five years		792			—			—		792
Total		2,130			516			192		2,838
Analysed as:
Bonds		1,938			710			—		2,648
Rate derivatives – inflows		(364	)		(297	)		—		(661	)
Rate derivatives – outflows		340			7			34		381
Trade creditors		216			96			158		470
Total		2,130			516			192		2,838

All cash flow projections shown above are on an undiscounted basis. Any cash flows based on a floating rate are calculated using interest rates as set at the date of the last rate reset. Where this is not possible, floating rates are based on interest rates prevailing at 31 December in the relevant year. All derivative amounts are shown gross, although the Group net settles these amounts wherever possible.

Any amounts drawn under revolving credit facilities and commercial paper are assumed to mature at the maturity date of the relevant facility, with interest calculated as payable in each calendar year up to and including the date of maturity of the facility.

F-45

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

Financial counterparty risk management

Counterparty credit limits, which take published credit rating and other factors into account, are set to cover our total aggregate exposure to a single financial institution. The limits applicable to published credit ratings bands are approved by the chief financial officer within guidelines approved by the board. Exposures and limits applicable to each financial institution are reviewed on a regular basis.

Foreign currency risk management

Although the Group is based in the UK, it has its most significant investment in overseas operations. The most significant currency for the Group is the US dollar. The Group’s policy on routine transactional conversions between currencies (for example, the collection of receivables, and the settlement of payables or interest) remains that these should be transacted at the relevant spot exchange rate. The majority of the Group’s operations are domestic within their country of operation. No unremitted profits are hedged with foreign exchange contracts, as the company judges it inappropriate to hedge non-cash flow translational exposure with cash flow instruments. However, the Group does seek to create a natural hedge of this exposure through its policy of aligning approximately the currency composition of its core net borrowings (after the impact of cross currency rate derivatives) with its forecast operating profit before depreciation and amortisation. This policy aims to soften the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on consolidated interest cover and earnings. The policy above applies only to currencies that account for more than 15% of Group operating profit before depreciation and amortisation, which currently is only the US dollar. The Group still borrows small amounts in other currencies, typically for seasonal working capital needs. Our policy does not require existing currency debt to be terminated to match declines in that currency’s share of Group operating profit before depreciation and amortisation. In addition, currencies that account for less than 15% of Group operating profit before depreciation and amortisation can be included in the above hedging process at the request of the chief financial officer.

Included within year end net debt, the net borrowings/(cash) in the hedging currencies above (taking into account the effect of cross currency swaps) were: US dollar £1,266m, sterling £(185)m and South African rand £(1)m.

Use of currency debt and currency derivatives

The Group uses both currency denominated debt and derivative instruments to implement the above policy. Its intention is that gains/losses on the derivatives and debt offset the losses/gains on the foreign currency assets and income. Each quarter the value of hedging instruments is monitored against the assets in the relevant currency and, where practical, a decision is made whether to treat the debt or derivative as a net investment hedge (permitting foreign exchange movements on it to be taken to reserves) for the purposes of IAS 39.

Financial instruments – fair value measurement

The following table provides an analysis of those financial instruments that are measured subsequent to initial recognition at fair value, grouped into levels 1 to 3, based on the degree to which the fair value is observable:

Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs, other than quoted prices included within level 1, that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (as prices) or indirectly (derived from prices); and

Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

F-46

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

Financial instruments – fair value measurement continued

	2011											2010
All figures in £ millions	Level 1		Level 2			Level 3			Total			Level 1		Level 2			Level 3			Total
Financial assets at fair value
Derivative financial assets		—		177			—			177			—		140			—			140
Marketable securities		—		9			—			9			—		12			—			12
Available for sale financial assets
Investments in unlisted securities		—		—			26			26			—		—			58			58
Financial liabilities at fair value
Derivative financial liabilities		—		(3	)		—			(3	)		—		(6	)		—			(6	)
Other financial liabilities – put options over non-controlling interest		—		—			(86	)		(86	)		—		—			(25	)		(25	)
Total		—		183			(60	)		123			—		146			33			179

The following table analyses the movements in level 3 fair value measurements:

	2011						2010
All figures in £ millions	Investments in unlisted securities			Other financial liabilities			Investments in unlisted securities			Other financial liabilities
At beginning of year		58			(25	)		62			(23	)
Exchange differences		—			3			1			—
Additions		13			(63	)		7			(2	)
Fair value movements		—			(1	)		—			—
Disposals		(45	)		—			(12	)		—
At end of year		26			(86	)		58			(25	)

The fair value of the investments in unlisted securities is determined by reference to the financial performance of the underlying asset and amounts realised on the sale of similar assets. The fair value of other financial liabilities represents the present value of the estimated future liability.

Financial instruments – sensitivity analysis

As at 31 December 2011 the sensitivity of the carrying value of the Group’s financial instruments to fluctuations in interest rates and exchange rates is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	Carrying value			Impact of 1% increase in interest rates			Impact of 1% decrease in interest rates			Impact of 10% strengthening in sterling			Impact of 10% weakening in sterling
Investments in unlisted securities		26			—			—			1			(1	)
Cash and cash equivalents		1,369			—			—			(78	)		96
Marketable securities		9			—			—			—			—
Derivative financial instruments		174			(53	)		56			8			(10	)
Bonds		(1,955	)		52			(53	)		127			(156	)
Other borrowings		(96	)		—			—			8			(10	)
Put options over non-controlling interest		(86	)		—			—			8			(10	)
Other net financial assets		578			—			—			(43	)		53
Total financial instruments		19			(1	)		3			31			(38	)

F-47

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19. Financial risk management continued

Financial instruments – sensitivity analysis continued

The table shows the sensitivities of the fair values of each class of financial instruments to an isolated change in either interest rates or foreign exchange rates. The class ‘Other net financial assets’ comprises trade assets less trade liabilities.

The sensitivities of derivative instruments are calculated using established estimation techniques such as discounted cash flow and option valuation models. Where modelling an interest rate decrease of 1% led to negative interest rates, these points on the yield curve were adjusted to 0%. A large proportion of the movements shown above would impact equity rather than the income statement, depending on the location and functional currency of the entity in which they arise and the availability of net investment hedge treatment. The changes in valuations are estimates of the impact of changes in market variables and are not a prediction of future events or anticipated gains or losses.

20. Intangible assets – Pre-publication

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
Cost
At beginning of year		1,863			1,727
Exchange differences		6			52
Additions		331			319
Disposals		(249	)		(248	)
Acquisition through business combination		14			13
At end of year		1,965			1,863
Amortisation
At beginning of year		(1,216	)		(1,077	)
Exchange differences		(11	)		(33	)
Charge for the year		(331	)		(350	)
Disposals		249			248
Acquisition through business combination		(6	)		(4	)
At end of year		(1,315	)		(1,216	)
Carrying amounts
At end of year		650			647

Included in the above are pre-publication assets amounting to £413m (2010: £399m) which will be realised in more than one year.

Amortisation is included in the income statement in cost of goods sold.

21. Inventories

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Raw materials		24		34
Work in progress		20		19
Finished goods		363		376
		407		429

F-48

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

21. Inventories continued

The cost of inventories relating to continuing operations recognised as an expense and included in the income statement in cost of goods sold amounted to £829m (2010: £836m). In 2011 £74m (2010: £87m) of inventory provisions was charged in the income statement. None of the inventory is pledged as security.

22. Trade and other receivables

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Current
Trade receivables		1,048		1,028
Royalty advances		107		111
Prepayments and accrued income		90		77
Other receivables		141		121
		1,386		1,337
Non-current
Trade receivables		13		3
Royalty advances		88		89
Prepayments and accrued income		34		28
Other receivables		16		9
		151		129

Trade receivables are stated at fair value, net of provisions for bad and doubtful debts and anticipated future sales returns. The movements on the provision for bad and doubtful debts are as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
At beginning of year		(83	)		(76	)
Exchange differences		1			(2	)
Income statement movements		(31	)		(33	)
Utilised		17			26
Acquisition through business combination		(8	)		(3	)
Disposal through business disposal		2			5
At end of year		(102	)		(83	)

Concentrations of credit risk with respect to trade receivables are limited due to the Group’s large number of customers, who are internationally dispersed.

F-49

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

22. Trade and other receivables continued

The ageing of the Group’s trade receivables is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
Within due date		1,097			1,180
Up to three months past due date		297			234
Three to six months past due date		46			39
Six to nine months past due date		10			6
Nine to 12 months past due date		14			13
More than 12 months past due date		50			21
Total trade receivables		1,514			1,493
Less: provision for bad and doubtful debts		(102	)		(83	)
Less: provision for sales returns		(351	)		(379	)
Net trade receivables		1,061			1,031

The Group reviews its bad debt provision at least twice a year following a detailed review of receivable balances and historic payment profiles. Management believe all the remaining receivable balances are fully recoverable.

23. Provisions for other liabilities and charges

All figures in £ millions	Deferred consideration			Property			Legal and other			Total
At 1 January 2011		29			20			11			60
Exchange differences		—			—			1			1
Charged to income statement		1			2			32			35
Released to income statement		—			(3	)		—			(3	)
Acquisition through business combination —current year		69			—			9			78
Utilised		(2	)		(2	)		(4	)		(8	)
At 31 December 2011		97			17			49			163

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Analysis of provisions
Non-current		115		42
Current		48		18
		163		60

Deferred consideration primarily relates to the acquisition of Fronter in 2009 and the formation of a venture in the US Professional business in 2011 for which deferred consideration of £66m is recognised.

Legal and other includes provisions in relation to legal claims, contract disputes and potential contract losses.

F-50

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

24. Trade and other liabilities

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Trade payables		483		470
Social security and other taxes		25		22
Accruals		544		559
Deferred income		678		559
Interest payable		18		12
Put options over non-controlling interest		86		25
Other liabilities		232		204
		2,066		1,851
Less: non-current portion
Accruals		25		26
Deferred income		147		120
Put options over non-controlling interest		62		25
Interest payable		6		—
Other liabilities		85		75
		325		246
Current portion		1,741		1,605

The carrying value of the Group’s trade and other liabilities approximates its fair value.

The deferred income balance comprises principally: multi-year obligations to deliver workbooks to adoption customers in school businesses; advance payments in assessment and testing businesses; subscription income in school and newspaper businesses; and obligations to deliver digital content in future periods.

The put options over non-controlling interest are the fair value of options held by the non-controlling interests in the Group’s Southern African, Indian and Mexican businesses.

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations

Background

The Group operates a number of defined benefit and defined contribution retirement plans throughout the world. For the defined benefit plans, benefits are based on employees’ length of service and final pensionable pay. Defined contribution benefits are based on the amount of contributions paid in respect of an individual member, the investment returns earned and the amount of pension this money will buy when a member retires.

The largest plan is the Pearson Group Pension Plan (‘UK Group plan’) with both defined benefit and defined contribution sections. From 1 November 2006, all sections of the UK Group plan were closed to new members with the exception of a defined contribution section that was opened in 2003. This section is available to all new employees of participating companies. The other major defined benefit plans are based in the US.

Other defined contribution plans are operated principally overseas with the largest plan being in the US. The specific features of these plans vary in accordance with the regulations of the country in which employees are located.

Pearson also has several post-retirement medical benefit plans (PRMBs), principally in the US. PRMBs are unfunded but are accounted for and valued similarly to defined benefit pension plans.

F-51

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Assumptions

The principal assumptions used for the UK Group plan and the US PRMB are shown below. Weighted average assumptions have been shown for the other plans, which primarily relate to US pension plans.

	2011						2010						2009
%	UK Group plan		Other plans		PRMB		UK Group plan		Other plans		PRMB		UK Group plan		Other plans		PRMB
Inflation		3.0		2.5		2.5		3.5		2.5		2.5		3.5		2.5		2.5
Rate used to discount plan liabilities		4.9		4.2		4.2		5.5		5.1		5.1		5.7		5.3		5.5
Expected return on assets		5.7		6.4		—		6.0		6.6		—		6.0		6.8		—
Expected rate of increase in salaries		4.0		4.0		—		4.7		4.0		—		5.0		4.0		—
Expected rate of increase for pensions in payment and deferred pensions		2.4 to 4.3		—		—		2.6 to 4.4		—		—		2.6 to 4.4		—		—
Initial rate of increase in healthcare rate		—		—		7.5		—		—		8.0		—		—		8.5
Ultimate rate of increase in healthcare rate		—		—		5.0		—		—		5.0		—		—		5.0

The UK discount rate is based on the annualised yield on the iBoxx over 15-year AA-rated corporate bond index, adjusted to reflect the duration of liabilities. The US discount rate is set by reference to a US bond portfolio matching model.

The inflation rate for the UK Group plan of 3.0% reflects the RPI rate. In line with changes to legislation in 2010 certain benefits have been calculated with reference to CPI as the inflationary measure and in these instances a rate of 2.0% has been used. The change from RPI to CPI for deferred revaluation and Post 88 GMP pension increases in payment for 2010 has been included in the prior year results, resulting in a gain of £23m, taken as an actuarial gain on the obligation.

The expected rates of return on categories of plan assets are determined by reference to relevant indices. The overall expected rate of return is calculated by weighting the individual rates in accordance with the anticipated balance in the plan’s investment portfolio, plus a diversification premium.

The expected rate of increase in salaries has been set at 4.0% for 2011 with a short-term assumption of 3.3% for three years.

For the UK plan the mortality base table assumptions have been derived from the SAPS ‘all pensioners’ tables for males and the SAPS ‘normal health pensioners’ tables for females, adjusted to reflect the observed experience of the plan, with medium cohort improvement factors. A 1.5% improvement floor on the medium cohort is applied for males, and 1.25% for females, with tapering.

For the US plans the RP2000 table is used, reflecting the mortality assumption most prevalent in the US. In 2010 a 10 year projection was added.

F-52

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Using the above tables, the remaining average life expectancy in years of a pensioner retiring at age 65 on the balance sheet date for the UK Group plan and US plans is as follows:

	UK				US
	2011		2010		2011		2010
Male		22.6		22.8		19.2		18.4
Female		23.5		23.6		21.1		20.6

The remaining average life expectancy in years of a pensioner retiring at age 65, 20 years after the balance sheet date, for the UK and US Group plans is as follows:

	UK				US
	2011		2010		2011		2010
Male		25.2		25.4		19.2		18.4
Female		25.6		25.7		21.1		20.6

Financial statement information

The amounts recognised in the income statement are as follows:

	2011
All figures in £ millions	UK Group plan			Defined benefit other			Sub-total			Defined contribution		PRMB		Total
Current service cost		21			3			24			69		3		96
Total operating expense		21			3			24			69		3		96
Expected return on plan assets		(107	)		(7	)		(114	)		—		—		(114	)
Interest on plan liabilities		100			8			108			—		3		111
Net finance (income)/expense		(7	)		1			(6	)		—		3		(3	)
Net income statement charge		14			4			18			69		6		93
Actual return on plan assets		161			5			166			—		—		166

	2010
All figures in £ millions	UK Group plan			Defined benefit other			Sub-total			Defined contribution		PRMB		Total
Current service cost		21			2			23			68		2		93
Curtailments		(5	)		—			(5	)		—		—		(5	)
Total operating expense		16			2			18			68		2		88
Expected return on plan assets		(93	)		(7	)		(100	)		—		—		(100	)
Interest on plan liabilities		100			9			109			—		3		112
Net finance expense		7			2			9			—		3		12
Net income statement charge		23			4			27			68		5		100
Actual return on plan assets		177			13			190			—		—		190

F-53

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

	2009
All figures in £ millions	UK Group plan			Defined benefit other			Sub-total			Defined contribution		PRMB		Total
Current service cost		14			3			17			62		2		81
Past service cost		—			1			1			—		—		1
Total operating expense		14			4			18			62		2		82
Expected return on plan assets		(83	)		(5	)		(88	)		—		—		(88	)
Interest on plan liabilities		89			8			97			—		3		100
Net finance expense		6			3			9			—		3		12
Net income statement charge		20			7			27			62		5		94
Actual return on plan assets		136			8			144			—		—		144

There are no amounts in the 2011 results relating to discontinued operations.

Included within the 2010 results are discontinued operations of £5m relating to the curtailment credit, a £1m charge relating to defined benefit schemes and a £2m charge relating to defined contribution schemes (2009: £2m charge relating to defined benefit schemes and £2m charge relating to defined contribution schemes).

The amounts recognised in the balance sheet are as follows:

	2011												2010
All figures in £ millions	UK Group plan			Other funded plans			Other unfunded plans			Total			UK Group plan			Other funded plans			Other unfunded plans			Total
Fair value of plan assets		2,008			149			—			2,157			1,847			135			—			1,982
Present value of defined benefit obligation		(1,983	)		(173	)		(24	)		(2,180	)		(1,852	)		(158	)		(20	)		(2,030	)
Net pension asset/(liability)		25			(24	)		(24	)		(23	)		(5	)		(23	)		(20	)		(48	)
Other post-retirement medical benefit obligation											(85	)											(72	)
Other pension accruals											(33	)											(28	)
Net retirement benefit obligations											(141	)											(148	)
Analysed as:
Retirement benefit assets											25												—
Retirement benefit obligations											(166	)											(148	)

The following (losses)/gains have been recognised in other comprehensive income:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010			2009
Amounts recognised for defined benefit plans		(47	)		75			(295	)
Amounts recognised for post-retirement medical benefit plans		(9	)		(5	)		(4	)
Total recognised in year		(56	)		70			(299	)
Cumulative amounts recognised		(232	)		(176	)		(246	)

F-54

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

The fair value of plan assets comprises the following:

	2011						2010
%	UK Group plan		Other funded plans		Total		UK Group plan		Other funded plans		Total
Equities		31.6		2.7		34.3		27.0		3.3		30.3
Bonds		44.7		3.4		48.1		49.3		2.7		52.0
Properties		11.1		0.1		11.2		11.2		0.1		11.3
Other		5.6		0.8		6.4		5.6		0.8		6.4

The plan assets do not include any of the Group’s own financial instruments, or any property occupied by the Group.

Changes in the values of plan assets and liabilities of the retirement benefit plans are as follows:

	2011									2010
All figures in £ millions	UK Group plan			Other plans			Total			UK Group plan			Other plans			Total
Fair value of plan assets
Opening fair value of plan assets		1,847			135			1,982			1,609			118			1,727
Exchange differences		—			1			1			—			4			4
Expected return on plan assets		107			7			114			93			7			100
Actuarial gains/(losses)		54			(2	)		52			84			6			90
Contributions by employer		71			18			89			132			13			145
Contributions by employee		3			—			3			3			—			3
Benefits paid		(74	)		(10	)		(84	)		(74	)		(13	)		(87	)
Closing fair value of plan assets		2,008			149			2,157			1,847			135			1,982
Present value of defined benefit obligation
Opening defined benefit obligation		(1,852	)		(178	)		(2,030	)		(1,798	)		(169	)		(1,967	)
Exchange differences		—			—			—			—			(5	)		(5	)
Current service cost		(21	)		(3	)		(24	)		(21	)		(2	)		(23	)
Curtailment		—			—			—			5			—			5
Interest cost		(100	)		(8	)		(108	)		(100	)		(9	)		(109	)
Actuarial losses		(81	)		(18	)		(99	)		(9	)		(6	)		(15	)
Contributions by employee		(3	)		—			(3	)		(3	)		—			(3	)
Benefits paid		74			10			84			74			13			87
Closing defined benefit obligation		(1,983	)		(197	)		(2,180	)		(1,852	)		(178	)		(2,030	)

F-55

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

Changes in the value of the US PRMB are as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010
Opening defined benefit obligation		(72	)		(65	)
Exchange differences		(2	)		(2	)
Current service cost		(3	)		(2	)
Interest cost		(3	)		(3	)
Actuarial losses		(9	)		(5	)
Benefits paid		4			5
Closing defined benefit obligation		(85	)		(72	)

The history of the defined benefit plans is as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010			2009			2008			2007
Fair value of plan assets		2,157			1,982			1,727			1,578			1,853
Present value of defined benefit obligation		(2,180	)		(2,030	)		(1,967	)		(1,594	)		(1,811	)
Net pension (liability)/asset		(23	)		(48	)		(240	)		(16	)		42
Experience adjustments on plan assets		52			90			56			(268	)		29
Experience adjustments on plan liabilities		(99	)		(15	)		(351	)		194			50

Funding

The UK Group plan is self-administered with the plan’s assets being held independently of the Group. The trustees of the plan are required to act in the best interest of the plan’s beneficiaries. The most recent triennial actuarial valuation for funding purposes was completed as at 1 January 2009 and this valuation revealed a funding shortfall. The Group has agreed that the funding shortfall will be eliminated by 31 December 2020. In 2011 the Group contributed £48m (2010: £41m) towards the funding shortfall and has agreed to contribute a similar amount per annum until 2020 in excess of regular contributions. Regular contributions to the plan are estimated to be £22m for 2012.

Under UK law (section 75 debt) a company that participates in a multi-employer defined benefit plan is liable, on withdrawal from that pension plan, for its share of the total deficit in the plan calculated on a ‘solvency’ or ‘buy out’ basis. The Interactive Data sale and the termination of Interactive Data Corporation (Europe) Ltd’s participation in the UK Group plan triggered this ‘section 75’ liability. £68m was contributed to the plan in respect of this liability in 2010.

The Group expects to contribute $83m in 2012 and $86m in 2013 to its US pension plans.

Future benefit payments

The following table shows the expected benefit payments from the defined benefit plans over the next 10 years. These use actuarial assumptions as at 31 December 2011. These represent payments from the pension funds to pensioners and others entitled to benefits, and are not an indication of payments from the company. For company funding requirements refer to the prior section.

F-56

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

25. Retirement benefit and other post-retirement obligations continued

All figures in £ millions	UK Group plan		Defined benefit other		Total
Expected future benefit payments:
2012		74		24		98
2013		76		23		99
2014		79		24		103
2015		82		21		103
2016		86		18		104
2017 to 2021 combined		479		80		559

Sensitivities

The net retirement benefit obligations are calculated using a number of assumptions, the most significant being the discount rate used to calculate the defined benefit obligation. The effect of a one percentage point increase and decrease in the discount rate on the defined benefit obligation and the total pension expense is as follows:

	2011
All figures in £ millions	1% increase			1% decrease
Effect on:
(Decrease)/increase in defined benefit obligation – UK Group plan		(282.0	)		348.5
Decrease of aggregate of service cost and interest cost – UK Group plan		(0.7	)		(1.2	)
(Decrease)/increase in defined benefit obligation – US plan		(11.7	)		14.0

The effect of members living one year more or one year less on the defined benefit obligation is as follows:

	2011
All figures in £ millions	1 year increase		1 year decrease
Effect on:
Increase/(decrease) in defined benefit obligation – UK Group plan		53.6		(52.1	)
Increase/(decrease) in defined benefit obligation – US plan		1.9		(2.0	)

The effect of a one percentage point increase and decrease in the assumed medical cost trend rates is as follows:

	2011
All figures in £ millions	1% increase		1% decrease
Effect on:
Increase/(decrease) in post-retirement medical benefit obligation		3.2		(2.8	)
Increase/(decrease) of aggregate of service cost and interest cost		0.1		(0.1	)

26. Share-based payments

The Group recognised the following charges in the income statement in respect of its equity-settled share-based payment plans:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010		2009
Pearson plans		40		35		27

F-57

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Share-based payments continued

Share-based payments included in discontinued operations amounted to £nil (2010: £4m; 2009: £10m).

The Group operates the following equity-settled employee option and share plans:

Worldwide Save for Shares Plan Since 1994, the Group has operated a Save-As-You-Earn plan for UK employees. In 1998, the Group introduced a Worldwide Save for Shares Plan. Under these plans, employees can save a portion of their monthly salary over periods of three, five or seven years. At the end of this period, the employee has the option to purchase ordinary shares with the accumulated funds at a purchase price equal to 80% of the market price prevailing at the time of the commencement of the employee’s participation in the plan. Options that are not exercised within six months of the end of the savings period lapse unconditionally.

Employee Stock Purchase Plan In 2000, the Group established an Employee Stock Purchase Plan which allows all employees in the US to save a portion of their monthly salary over six month periods. At the end of the period, the employee has the option to purchase ADRs with their accumulated funds at a purchase price equal to 85% of the lower of the market price prevailing at the beginning or end of the period.

Long-Term Incentive Plan This plan was first introduced in 2001, renewed in 2006 and again in 2011. The plan consists of two parts: share options and/or restricted shares.

Options were last granted under this plan in 2001 based on a pre-grant earnings per share growth test and were not subject to further performance conditions on exercise. The options became exercisable in tranches and lapsed if they remained unexercised at the tenth anniversary of the date of grant. Any outstanding options remaining lapsed during 2011.

The vesting of restricted shares is normally dependent on continuing service over a three to five-year period, and in the case of senior management upon the satisfaction of corporate performance targets over a three-year period. These targets may be based on market and/or non-market performance criteria. Restricted shares awarded to senior management in March 2010 and May 2011 vest dependent on relative total shareholder return, return on invested capital and earnings per share growth. The award was split equally across all three measures. Other restricted shares awarded in 2010 and 2011 vest depending on continuing service over a three-year period.

Annual Bonus Share Matching Plan This plan permits executive directors and senior executives around the Group to invest up to 50% of any after tax annual bonus in Pearson shares. If these shares are held and the Group meets an earnings per share growth target, the company will match them on a gross basis of up to one matching share for every invested share i.e. the maximum number of matching shares is equal to the number of shares that could have been acquired with the amount of the pre-tax annual bonus taken in invested shares.

In addition to the above, share options under Executive Share Option, Reward and Special Share Option Plans, legacy plans which were replaced with the introduction of the Long-Term Incentive Plan in 2001, lapsed during 2011.

F-58

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Share-based payments continued

The number and weighted average exercise prices of share options granted under the Group’s plans are as follows:

	2011					2010
	Number of share options 000s			Weighted average exercise price £		Number of share options 000s			Weighted average exercise price £
Outstanding at beginning of year		8,878			10.20		12,487			12.78
Granted during the year		1,157			8.92		628			8.06
Exercised during the year		(2,323	)		7.27		(1,154	)		7.12
Forfeited during the year		(457	)		8.54		(457	)		9.08
Expired during the year		(4,052	)		14.12		(2,626	)		23.47
Outstanding at end of year		3,203			7.15		8,878			10.20
Options exercisable at end of year		64			5.54		5,825			12.40

Options were exercised regularly throughout the year. The weighted average share price during the year was £11.14 (2010: £9.63). Early exercises arising from redundancy, retirement or death are treated as an acceleration of vesting and the Group therefore recognises in the income statement the amount that otherwise would have been recognised for services received over the remainder of the original vesting period.

The options outstanding at the end of the year have weighted average remaining contractual lives and exercise prices as follows:

	2011				2010
Range of exercise prices £	Number of share options 000s		Weighted average contractual life Years		Number of share options 000s		Weighted average contractual life Years
0 – 5		—		—		38		0.65
5 – 10		3,203		2.51		4,757		1.86
10 – 15		—		—		4,083		0.36
15 – 20		—		—		—		—
20 – 25		—		—		—		—
>25		—		—		—		—
		3,203		2.51		8,878		1.17

In 2011 and 2010 options were granted under the Worldwide Save for Shares Plan. The weighted average estimated fair value for the options granted was calculated using a Black-Scholes option pricing model.

F-59

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

26. Share-based payments continued

The weighted average estimated fair values and the inputs into the Black-Scholes model are as follows:

	2011 Weighted average			2010 Weighted average
Fair value	£	2.97		£	2.14
Weighted average share price	£	11.47		£	9.48
Weighted average exercise price	£	8.92		£	8.06
Expected volatility		27.50	%		28.28	%
Expected life		4.0 years			4.0 years
Risk free rate		1.91	%		2.24	%
Expected dividend yield		3.37	%		3.75	%
Forfeiture rate		3.5	%		3.5	%

The expected volatility is based on the historic volatility of the company’s share price over the previous three to seven years depending on the vesting term of the options.

The following shares were granted under restricted share arrangements:

	2011				2010
	Number of shares 000s		Weighted average fair value £		Number of shares 000s		Weighted average fair value £
Long-Term Incentive Plan		4,854		10.44		4,742		9.45
Annual Bonus Share Matching Plan		285		11.29		266		10.25

The fair value of shares granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan that vest unconditionally is determined using the share price at the date of grant. The number of shares expected to vest is adjusted, based on historical experience, to account for potential forfeitures. Restricted shares granted under the Annual Bonus Share Matching Plan are valued using the share price at the date of grant. Participants under both plans are entitled to dividends during the vesting period and therefore the share price is not discounted.

Restricted shares with a market performance condition were valued by an independent actuary using a Monte Carlo model. Restricted shares with a non-market performance condition were fair valued based on the share price at the date of grant. Non-market performance conditions are taken into consideration by adjusting the number of shares expected to vest based on the most likely outcome of the relevant performance criteria.

27. Share capital and share premium

	Number of shares 000s		Ordinary shares £m		Share premium £m
At 1 January 2010		810,799		203		2,512
Issue of ordinary shares – share option schemes		1,878		—		12
At 31 December 2010		812,677		203		2,524
Issue of ordinary shares – share option schemes		2,949		1		20
At 31 December 2011		815,626		204		2,544

F-60

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

27. Share capital and share premium continued

The ordinary shares have a par value of 25p per share (2010: 25p per share). All issued shares are fully paid. All shares have the same rights.

The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will be able to continue as a going concern while maximising the return to shareholders through the optimisation of the debt and equity balance.

The capital structure of the Group consists of debt (see note 18), cash and cash equivalents (see note 17) and equity attributable to equity holders of the parent, comprising issued capital, reserves and retained earnings.

The Group reviews its capital structure on a regular basis and will balance its overall capital structure through payments of dividends, new share issues as well as the issue of new debt or the redemption of existing debt in line with the financial risk policies outlined in note 19.

28. Treasury shares

	Pearson plc						Interactive Data						Total
	Number of shares 000s			£m			Number of shares 000s			£m			£m
At 1 January 2010		9,665			96			10,485			130			226
Purchase of treasury shares		8,000			77			—			—			77
Release/cancellation of treasury shares		(3,656	)		(36	)		(10,485	)		(130	)		(166	)
At 31 December 2010		14,009			137			—			—			137
Purchase of treasury shares		5,387			60			—			—			60
Release of treasury shares		(4,731	)		(48	)		—			—			(48	)
At 31 December 2011		14,665			149			—			—			149

The Group holds Pearson plc shares in trust to satisfy its obligations under its restricted share plans (see note 26). These shares, representing 1.8% (2010: 1.7%) of called-up share capital, are treated as treasury shares for accounting purposes and have a par value of 25p per share.

The nominal value of Pearson plc treasury shares amounts to £3.7m (2010: £3.5m).

At 31 December 2011 the market value of Pearson plc treasury shares was £177.4m (2010: £141.2m).

F-61

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

29. Other comprehensive income

	2011
	Attributable to equity holders of the Company
All figures in £ millions	Translation reserve			Retained earnings			Total			Non-controlling interest			Total
Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations		(38	)		—			(38	)		(6	)		(44	)
Actuarial losses on retirement benefit obligations – Group		—			(56	)		(56	)		—			(56	)
Actuarial losses on retirement benefit obligations – associate		—			(8	)		(8	)					(8	)
Tax on items recognised in other comprehensive income					3			3			—			3
Total other comprehensive expense for the year		(38	)		(61	)		(99	)		(6	)		(105	)

	2010
	Attributable to equity holders of the Company								Non-controlling interest		Total
All figures in £ millions	Translation reserve		Retained earnings			Total
Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations		162		—			162			11		173
Currency translation adjustment disposed – subsidiaries		13		—			13			—		13
Actuarial gains on retirement benefit obligations – Group		—		70			70			—		70
Actuarial gains on retirement benefit obligations – associate		—		1			1			—		1
Tax on items recognised in other comprehensive income		—		(41	)		(41	)		—		(41	)
Total other comprehensive income for the year		175		30			205			11		216

F-62

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

29. Other comprehensive income continued

	2009
	Attributable to equity holders of the Company									Non-controlling interest			Total
All figures in £ millions	Translation reserve			Retained earnings			Total
Net exchange differences on translation of foreign operations		(359	)		—			(359	)		(29	)		(388	)
Actuarial losses on retirement benefit obligations – Group		—			(299	)		(299	)		—			(299	)
Actuarial losses on retirement benefit obligations – associate		—			(3	)		(3	)		—			(3	)
Net increase in fair values of proportionate holding arising on stepped acquisition		—			18			18			—			18
Tax on items recognised in other comprehensive income		—			91			91			—			91
Total other comprehensive income for the year		(359	)		(193	)		(552	)		(29	)		(581	)

30. Business combinations

On 31 May 2011 the North American Education business acquired Schoolnet, a leading provider of data-driven education software for students and teachers. On 10 June 2011, the International Education business completed the acquisition of EDI plc, a UK listed education services company operating primarily in the work based learning sector. On 1 November 2011 the North American Education business acquired Connections Education, a company that operates online or virtual public schools in the US and on 19 December 2011 the International Education business acquired Global Education and Technology Group, a leading provider of test preparation services for students in China who are learning English. The Group acquired a 100% interest in all the investments noted above.

Also in the year to 31 December 2011, the Group completed the acquisitions of CTI Education in South Africa, Tutorvista in India, Stark Holding in Germany, TQ in the UK and various other smaller acquisitions.

F-63

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

30. Business combinations continued

Provisional values for the assets and liabilities arising from these and other acquisitions completed in the year together with adjustments to prior year acquisitions are as follows:

			2011																		2010
All figures in £ millions	Notes		Schoolnet fair value			EDI fair value			Connections fair value			Global Education fair value			Other fair value			Total fair value			Total fair value
Property, plant and equipment		10		1			4			4			9			3			21			17
Intangible assets		11		56			57			141			1			120			375			285
Intangible assets – Pre-publication		20		—			—			9			—			(1	)		8			9
Inventories				—			—			—			—			2			2			2
Trade and other receivables				4			14			22			4			14			58			41
Cash and cash equivalents				2			10			8			90			41			151			26
Financial liabilities – Borrowings				—			—			—			—			(9	)		(9	)		(13	)
Net deferred income tax liabilities		13		(15	)		(13	)		(51	)		—			(17	)		(96	)		(37	)
Retirement benefit obligations				—			(1	)		—			—			(3	)		(4	)		(1	)
Provisions for other liabilities and charges		23		—			—			—			—			(78	)		(78	)		(10	)
Trade and other liabilities				(8	)		(16	)		(13	)		(21	)		(57	)		(115	)		(37	)
Current income tax liabilities				—			—			—			—			(2	)		(2	)		(3	)
Non-controlling interest				—			—			—			—			(1	)		(1	)		(39	)
Net assets acquired at fair value				40			55			120			83			12			310			240
Goodwill		11		102			60			130			103			225			620			288
Fair value of previously held interest arising on stepped acquisition				—			—			—			—			(15	)		(15	)		—
Total				142			115			250			186			222			915			528
Satisfied by:
Cash				(142	)		(115	)		(250	)		(186	)		(220	)		(913	)		(530	)
Deferred consideration				—			—			—			—			—			—			(8	)
Net prior year adjustments				—			—			—			—			(2	)		(2	)		10
Total consideration				(142	)		(115	)		(250	)		(186	)		(222	)		(915	)		(528	)

The goodwill arising on these acquisitions results from substantial cost and revenue synergies and from benefits that cannot be separately recognised, such as the assembled workforce.

The fair value of trade and other receivables is £58m and includes trade receivables with a fair value of £47m. The gross contractual amount for trade receivables due is £55m of which £8m is expected to be uncollectable.

A provisional value of £1m of goodwill arising on 2011 acquisitions is expected to be deductible for tax purposes (2010: £12m).

F-64

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

30. Business combinations continued

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010			2009
Cash flow on acquisitions
Cash – Current year acquisitions		(913	)		(530	)		(201	)
Cash – Acquisitions yet to complete		—			—			(4	)
Deferred payments for prior year acquisitions and other items		(5	)		(20	)		(32	)
Cash and cash equivalents acquired		151			26			29
Acquisition costs paid		(12	)		(11	)		—
Net cash outflow		(779	)		(535	)		(208	)

Acquisitions in 2011 contributed £129m to sales and £9m to operating profit before acquisition costs and amortisation of acquired intangibles from the date of acquisition to the balance sheet date. Of these amounts, Schoolnet contributed £15m of sales and a loss of £2m, EDI contributed £17m of sales and £5m of profit and Connections contributed £24m of sales and £6m of profit. As Global Education was acquired late in December 2011 it did not contribute a significant amount of sales or profit in 2011.

If the acquisitions had completed on 1 January 2011, the Group estimates that sales for the period would have been £6,042m and profit before tax would have been £1,163m.

31. Disposals

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010			2009
Disposal of subsidiaries
Property, plant and equipment		10		—			(57	)		—
Intangible assets		11		(4	)		(88	)		—
Other financial assets				—			(3	)		—
Inventories				(7	)		—			—
Trade and other receivables				(5	)		(103	)		—
Cash and cash equivalents				(6	)		(165	)		—
Net deferred income tax liabilities		13		1			47			—
Retirement benefit obligations				1			8			—
Trade and other liabilities				2			132			—
Current income tax liabilities				1			12			—
Non-controlling interest				7			271			—
Attributable goodwill		11		(4	)		(195	)		—
Cumulative translation adjustment				—			(13	)		—
Net assets disposed				(14	)		(154	)		—
Cash received				—			1,234			—
Costs				—			(43	)		—
(Loss)/profit on sale				(14	)		1,037			—

All figures in £ millions	2011			2010			2009
Cash flow from disposals
Cash – Current year disposals		—			1,234			—
Cash and cash equivalents disposed		(6	)		(165	)		—
Costs paid		—			(32	)		—
Pension contribution paid on disposal		—			(53	)		—
Net cash (outflow)/inflow		(6	)		984			—

The disposal in 2011 relates to Longman Nigeria and in 2010 to Interactive Data. Further details of the Interactive Data disposal are shown in note 3.

F-65

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

32. Transactions with non-controlling interest

In 2011 the remaining non-controlling interest in Sistema Educacional Brasileiro was acquired for £108m. In 2010 the transactions with non-controlling interests (£7m) comprise the acquisition of the remaining non-controlling interest in our Italian Education business and the receipt of proceeds from shares issued to employees of Interactive Data. In 2009 the transactions with non-controlling interests of £14m relates to the receipt of proceeds from shares issued to employees of Interactive Data.

33. Cash generated from operations

All figures in £ millions	Notes		2011			2010			2009
Profit				956			1,300			462
Adjustments for:
Income tax				199			480			198
Depreciation		10		70			82			85
Amortisation of acquired intangible assets		11		139			113			103
Amortisation of other intangible assets		11		48			51			44
Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment				—			3			2
Net finance costs		6		71			73			95
Share of results of joint ventures and associates		12		(33	)		(41	)		(30	)
Profit on disposal of discontinued operations		3		—			(1,037	)		—
(Profit)/loss on disposals				(435	)		10			—
Acquisition costs				12			11			—
Net foreign exchange adjustment from transactions				24			(3	)		(14	)
Share-based payment costs		26		40			39			37
Pre-publication				2			29			(16	)
Inventories				15			37			32
Trade and other receivables				(9	)		(82	)		(14	)
Trade and other liabilities				31			165			103
Retirement benefit obligations				(65	)		(64	)		(72	)
Provisions for other liabilities and charges				28			3			(3	)
Net cash generated from operations				1,093			1,169			1,102

Net cash generated from operations is translated at an exchange rate approximating to the rate at the date of cash flow. The difference between this rate and the average rate used to translate profit gives rise to a currency adjustment in the reconciliation between net profit and net cash generated from operations. This adjustment reflects the timing difference between recognition of profit and the related cash receipts or payments.

In the cash flow statement, proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment comprise:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010			2009
Net book amount		9		3			3
Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment		—		(3	)		(2	)
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment		9		—			1

The principal other non-cash transactions are movements in finance lease obligations of £10m (2010: £2m; 2009: £8m).

F-66

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

34. Contingencies

There are contingent Group liabilities that arise in the normal course of business in respect of indemnities, warranties and guarantees in relation to former subsidiaries and in respect of guarantees in relation to subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates. In addition there are contingent liabilities of the Group in respect of legal claims, contract disputes, royalties, copyright fees, permissions and other rights. None of these claims are expected to result in a material gain or loss to the group.

During the year various government bodies in the US and Europe have been in the process of investigating Penguin and other major publishers over the agency arrangements for selling ebooks. These investigations are ongoing and Penguin is cooperating fully with these inquiries. At the same time beginning in August 2011, Penguin and various other book publishers and book retailers have been sued in a number of private consumer class action law suits in the US which allege violation of the anti-trust and unfair competition laws by the defendants in connection with the adoption of the agency selling model for ebooks. The complaints in those suits generally seek treble damages, injunctive relief and attorneys’ fees. Penguin is defending itself in those actions and believes that it was fully compliant with all applicable laws.

35. Commitments

There were no commitments for capital expenditure contracted for at the balance sheet date but not yet incurred.

The Group leases various offices and warehouses under non-cancellable operating lease agreements. The leases have varying terms and renewal rights. The Group also leases various plant and equipment under operating lease agreements, also with varying terms. The lease expenditure charged to the income statement during the year is disclosed in note 4.

The future aggregate minimum lease payments in respect of operating leases are as follows:

All figures in £ millions	2011		2010
Not later than one year		179		164
Later than one year and not later than two years		164		151
Later than two years and not later than three years		149		130
Later than three years and not later than four years		134		112
Later than four years and not later than five years		119		95
Later than five years		980		785
		1,725		1,437

36. Related party transactions

Joint ventures and associates

Amounts advanced to joint ventures and associates during the year and at the balance sheet date are set out in note 12. There are no material amounts falling due from joint ventures and associates. In December 2011, the Group disposed of its 50% interest in FTSE International Ltd and details of this transaction are also shown in note 12.

F-67

Pearson plc

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

Key management personnel

Key management personnel are deemed to be the members of the board of directors of Pearson plc. It is this board which has responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Group. Key management personnel compensation is disclosed in the directors’ remuneration report.

There were no other material related party transactions.

No guarantees have been provided to related parties.

37. Events after the balance sheet date

There were no significant post balance sheet events.

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

Pearson plc

/s/ Robin Freestone

Robin Freestone

Chief Financial Officer

Date: March 27, 2012

F-68